1 #LyX 2.4 created this file. For more info see https://www.lyx.org/
5 \save_transient_properties true
6 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/ar/
9 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
11 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
12 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
13 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
14 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
15 % the documentation team
16 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
18 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
19 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
21 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
22 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
23 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
24 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
26 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
30 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
31 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
33 % for customized page headers/footers
34 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
36 % change header rule width
37 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
39 % used to have extra space in table cells
40 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
41 {\usepackage{array}}{}
42 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
44 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
45 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
46 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
48 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
49 \AtBeginDocument{\setdefaultlanguage[numerals=maghrib]{arabic}} %%%% without this line nomenclature list not appear in pdf.
50 %\renewcommand{\nomname}{المصطلحات}%% used arabic title for nomname
51 \newcommand\lettergroup[1]{} % without this line "unknown english letters" appear in the index list in pdf.
53 \setlength{\parskip}{\medskipamount}
54 \setlength{\parindent}{0pt}
56 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
57 \use_default_options false
62 \maintain_unincluded_children no
63 \language arabic_arabi
64 \language_package default
67 \font_roman "lmodern" "Scheherazade"
68 \font_sans "lmss" "Scheherazade"
69 \font_typewriter "lmtt" "Scheherazade"
70 \font_math "auto" "auto"
71 \font_default_family default
72 \use_non_tex_fonts true
76 \font_typewriter_osf false
77 \font_sf_scale 100 100
78 \font_tt_scale 100 100
80 \use_dash_ligatures false
82 \default_output_format pdf4
84 \bibtex_command bibtex
85 \index_command default
89 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
90 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
94 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
95 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
96 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
101 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
102 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
105 \use_package amsmath 1
106 \use_package amssymb 1
107 \use_package cancel 1
109 \use_package mathdots 1
110 \use_package mathtools 1
111 \use_package mhchem 1
112 \use_package stackrel 1
113 \use_package stmaryrd 1
114 \use_package undertilde 1
116 \cite_engine_type default
120 \paperorientation portrait
127 \notefontcolor #0000ff
131 \color #00ff00 #ff00ff
136 \color #aa55ff #55aa00
144 \paragraph_separation indent
145 \paragraph_indentation default
147 \math_numbering_side default
152 \paperpagestyle default
154 \tracking_changes false
155 \output_changes false
157 \postpone_fragile_content false
161 \docbook_table_output 0
162 \docbook_mathml_prefix 1
168 دليل مستخدم ليك \SpecialChar LyX
177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
179 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation,
180 please send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
181 Documentation mailing list:
183 \begin_inset CommandInset href
185 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
197 \begin_inset Newline newline
201 \begin_inset Newline newline
205 \begin_inset Note Note
208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
211 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
212 \begin_inset Newline newline
217 https://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/Manuals#UserGuide
225 \begin_layout Standard
226 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
227 LatexCommand tableofcontents
234 \begin_layout Chapter
238 \begin_layout Section
239 ما هو ليك \SpecialChar LyX
243 \begin_layout Standard
244 ليك هو نظام إعداد وثائق.
245 إنه أداة لإنتاج المخطوطات الجميلة والكتب القابلة للنشر،
246 خطابات الأعمال والمقترحات،
248 وهو يختلف عن معظم "معالجات الكلمات" بأنه يستخدم نموذج لغة الترميز كأسلوب تحرير أساسي.
249 وهذا يعني أنه عند كتابة عنوان القسم،
250 ووضع علامة عليه ك "قسم" فإنه سيقوم باختيار الحجم واللون والمحاذاة تلقائيا بالصورة المثالية المتعارف عليها،
251 ولا يحتاج أن تحدد له "خط ثخين،
255 ليك يعتني بالتنضيد لأجلك.
256 لذلك يمكنك التركيز فقط على محتوى كتابك،
257 وليس على آلية التنضيد.
260 \begin_layout Standard
261 وهذه الفلسفة تم شرحها بمزيد من التفصيل في كتيب المقدمة.
262 إذا كنت لم تقرأه بعد،
263 فأنت بالتأكيد تحتاج إلى ذلك.
265 نحن نعني الآن من فضلك.
268 \begin_layout Standard
269 كتيب المقدمة يصف عدة أشياء بالإضافة إلى فلسفة ليك:
270 الأشياء الأكثر أهمية،
273 سيكون عليك تخصيص جزء من وقتك لتصفحه.
274 وربما يكون من الأفضل الاطلاع بشكل سريع على بقية كتيبات المساعدة.
278 \begin_layout Section
279 كيف يبدو ليك \SpecialChar LyX
283 \begin_layout Standard
285 ليك لديه شريط القوائم المألوف في الجزء العلوي من النافذة.
286 وتحته شريط الأدوات مع مربع القائمة المنسدلة وأزرار مختلفة.
289 شريط التمرير الرأسي ومنطقة عمل رئيسية لتحرير الوثائق.لاحظ أنه لا يوجد شريط تمرير أفقي.
293 تتوقع نهاية السطر لتنتقل للسطر التالي.
294 لكن النص في ليك يتوزع على الصفحات بطريقة عمودية،
295 وبالتالي نحتاج إلى شريط التمرير الرأسي فقط.
296 إن هناك ثلاث حالات قد تجعلنا نرغب بشريط التمرير الأفقي.
297 الحالة الأولى هي الصور الكبيرة.
298 ولتجنب عرضها أكبر من الشاشة،
299 انقر بزر الفارة الأيمن على الصورة واستخدام الخيار على مقاس الشاشة في علامة التبويب خيارات لتيك و ليك.
300 الحالات الثانية والثالثة هي الجداول والمعادلات التي هي أوسع من نافذة ليك.
301 يمكنك استخدام مفاتيح الأسهم للتمرير أفقيا من خلال الجدول،
302 ولكن هذا لا يعمل مع للمعادلات حتى الآن.
305 \begin_layout Standard
306 للحصول على وصف موجز لجميع قوائم ليك وأشرطة الأدوات ،
312 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
314 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
322 \begin_layout Section
326 \begin_layout Standard
327 يتكون نظام المساعدة من كتيبات ليك.
328 ويمكنك قراءة جميع الكتيبات من داخل ليك.
329 وما عليك سوى اختيار كتيب الذي تريد قراءته من قائمة مساعدة.
332 \begin_layout Section
333 الإعدادات الأساسية لليك \SpecialChar LyX
335 \begin_inset CommandInset label
337 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
344 \begin_layout Standard
345 معظم مميزات ليك يمكن ضبطها من خلال قائمة
347 أدوات\SpecialChar menuseparator
352 \begin_inset Index idx
357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
363 ليك قادر على فحص نظامك لمعرفة البرامج المتوفرة عليه،
364 مثل حزم لتيك وأنواع مستندات لتيك.
365 إنه يساعدك على استخدم هذه المعلومات لإعداد التفضيلات الافتراضية المثالية للبرنامج.
366 على الرغم من أن ليك يقوم بهذه العملية آليا عند تركيبه لأول مره.
367 ومن المستحسن القيام بعملية إعادة الضبط
369 أدوات\SpecialChar menuseparator
372 إعادة ضبط النظام كل فترة،
373 \begin_inset Index idx
378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
384 لأن حزم لتيك تتحدث كل فترة،
385 ويجب أن لا ننسى إعادة تشغيل ليك بعد إعادة الضبط لتطبيق التغييرات.
388 \begin_layout Section
389 إعداد لتيك \SpecialChar LaTeX
391 \begin_inset CommandInset label
393 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
400 \begin_layout Standard
401 تستطيع تحرير مستند \SpecialChar LyX
402 بدون تركيب \SpecialChar LaTeX
404 لكنك لن تستطيع إنتاج ملفات PDF أو طباعة المستندات.
405 إن بعض مستندات \SpecialChar LyX
406 تستخدم DocBook وأمثاله كخلفية لإنتاج ملفات PDF .
407 وكل مستند \SpecialChar LyX
408 يمكن تصديره كملف نصي بسيط أو صفحة ويب تفاعلية XHTML .
411 \begin_layout Standard
412 بعض أنواع المستندات ربما تعتمد على حزم خاصة من \SpecialChar LaTeX
414 ومع هذا بعض المستندات يمكن استخدامها حتى بدون تركيب الحزم المطلوبة،
415 لكنك بالتأكيد لن تستطيع إنتاج أو تصديرها إلى أي نوع من الملفات.
418 \begin_layout Standard
419 حزم \SpecialChar LaTeX
420 الموجودة على النظام يمكن مشاهدتها في \SpecialChar LyX
423 مساعدة\SpecialChar menuseparator
425 إذا افتقدت حزم تحتاجها،
426 فإن عليك تركيبها ثم إعادة ضبط
431 أدوات\SpecialChar menuseparator
435 \begin_inset Index idx
440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
450 جديدة في كتيب التخصيص لتعرف معلومات أكثر عن تركيب حزم
456 \begin_layout Chapter
457 كيف تعمل مع \SpecialChar LyX
461 \begin_layout Section
463 \begin_inset Index idx
468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
477 \begin_layout Standard
478 تحت قائمة ملف وفي شريط الأدوات القياسي توجد العمليات الأساسية التي تراها في أي معالج كلمات بالإضافة إلى بعض العمليات المتقدمة:
481 \begin_layout Itemize
504 \begin_layout Itemize
521 arg "buffer-new-template"
527 \begin_layout Itemize
550 \begin_layout Itemize
560 \begin_layout Itemize
575 \begin_layout Itemize
598 \begin_layout Itemize
611 arg "buffer-write-as"
617 \begin_layout Itemize
627 \begin_layout Itemize
642 \begin_layout Standard
643 يمكننا أن نقوم بالكثير من الأشياء الجميلة بالشكل الذي نقوم به في معالجات الكلمات الأخرى.،
644 مع بعض الاختلافات البسيطة.
647 ملف\SpecialChar menuseparator
656 قالب يعرض قائمة بالقوالب المتاحة.
657 وعند اختيار قالب معين سوف يتم آليا تعيين خصائص النسق الخاص به للمستند،
658 إن هذه الخصائص كان عليك تعديلها يدويا لكن
664 فربما تستخدم نوع معين من المستندات،
665 وخصوصا كتابة الرسائل (أنظر قسم
668 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
670 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
680 \begin_layout Standard
683 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
694 \begin_inset Quotes eld
698 \begin_inset Quotes erd
702 \begin_inset Quotes eld
706 \begin_inset Quotes erd
710 \begin_inset Quotes eld
714 \begin_inset Quotes erd
717 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
718 to open a file or create a new one,
720 blank space is just that —
730 \begin_layout Standard
731 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
737 \begin_inset Quotes fld
741 \begin_inset Quotes frd
745 \begin_inset Quotes fld
749 \begin_inset Quotes frd
753 إلا إذا طلبت من \SpecialChar LyX
754 إنشاء ملف جديد أو فتح ملف موجود.
762 \begin_layout Standard
782 الإصدار عملية لكثير من الناس الذين يعملون على نفس المستند وفي نفس الوقت.
788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
789 إذا كنت تخطط لعمل هذا،
790 فإن عليك الخروج من ميزة تحكم الإصدار في \SpecialChar LyX
792 اقرأ كتيب خصائص إضافية.
808 للمحفوظ سوف تعيد تحميل المستند من القرص الصلب.
809 أنت تستطيع استخدامه أيضا إذا ندمت على تعديل المستند وأردت الرجوع لآخر حفظ.
818 الإصدار تستطيع تسجيل التعديلات التي صنعتها في مستند معين وبهذا يستطيع الآخرين التعرف على تغييراتك.
821 \begin_layout Section
822 عمليات التحرير الأساسية
823 \begin_inset Index idx
828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
835 \begin_inset CommandInset label
837 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
844 \begin_layout Standard
845 مثل معظم معالجات النصوص الحديثة،
847 يستطيع القيام بعمليات قص ولصق مقاطع نصية،
848 ويستطيع نقل كلمات أو نصوص،
849 ويستطيع حذف الكلمات والحروف طبعا.
850 الأقسام الأربعة التالية تغطي مميزات التحرير الأساسية في \SpecialChar LyX
854 \begin_layout Standard
856 قائمة تحرير وشريط الأدوات القياسي يملك وظائف القص واللصق،
857 مع وظائف التحرير المعروفة الأخرى.
858 بعض منها خاص وتم شرحه في أقسام أخرى.
861 \begin_layout Standard
865 \begin_layout Itemize
867 \begin_inset Index idx
872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
902 \begin_layout Itemize
904 \begin_inset Index idx
909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
939 \begin_layout Itemize
941 \begin_inset Index idx
946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
972 \begin_layout Itemize
982 \begin_layout Itemize
992 \begin_layout Itemize
1000 \begin_inset space ~
1006 \begin_inset Index idx
1011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1020 \begin_inset Index idx
1025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1041 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
1051 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1057 \begin_layout Standard
1058 إن أول ثلاثة أشياء تعرفها،
1059 أنك تستطيع نسخ النصوص بين ليك والبرامج الأخرى باستخدام قص،
1061 قص و لصق تضع النص داخل الحافظة في شكلين (مهيأ وغير مهيأ)،
1062 لهذا البرامج الأخرى تستطيع اختيار الشكل المناسب لها.
1063 أما وظيفة لصق فتدعم الاختيار اليدوي للنص المهيأ أو غير المهيأ عن طريق قائمة تحرير،
1064 وطبعا يمكن قص ونسخ ولصق الصور.
1065 إن هذه الوظائف تحاول التعامل مع محتوى الحافظة بطريقة ذكية.
1066 مثلا إذا كان النص في الحافظة بهيئة CSV والمؤشر داخل الجدول،
1067 فإن النص سيلصق داخل الخلايا.
1072 \begin_inset space ~
1077 لصق تظهر لك قائمة بآخر الأشياء التي لصقتها،
1078 وتستطيع إدراج أي واحد منها في المكان الذي به المؤشر عن طريق النقر على أي واحد منها في القائمة.
1081 \begin_layout Standard
1085 \begin_inset space ~
1088 خاص فتحتوي على عناصر اختيارية لهيئات ملفات خاصة،
1089 بناء على محتوى الحافظة.
1095 \begin_inset space ~
1102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1114 عناصر هذه القائمة تكون عملية إذا كانت الحافظة بها نفس المحتوى ولكن بهيئات مختلفة،
1115 واردت اختيار هيئة واحدة.
1116 (مثلا بعض البرامج تقوم بنسخ الصور في الحافظة كرسم وكنص) عنصر القائمة لصق
1117 \begin_inset space ~
1120 خاص\SpecialChar menuseparator
1122 \begin_inset space ~
1126 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1130 \begin_inset space ~
1134 مع اختلاف واحد وهو أنه يعمل مع النصوص فقط.
1135 إنه سوف يدرج النص من الحافظة ولهذا سيدرج كل النصوص في الحافظة كفقرة واحدة.
1136 والفقرة الجديدة ستبدأ في سطر فارغ جديد.
1138 \begin_inset space ~
1141 السطور سيدرج النص كفقرات في المكان الذي الذي انتهى فيه السطر.
1142 كمثال عملي نسخ محتوى جدول من صفحة ويب إلى جدول في ليك.
1144 \begin_inset space ~
1147 خاص\SpecialChar menuseparator
1149 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1153 \begin_inset space ~
1161 \begin_inset space ~
1164 خاص\SpecialChar menuseparator
1165 التحديد من التحديد الرئيسي.
1166 هذا عادة هو النص المحدد حاليا.
1169 \begin_layout Standard
1172 تحرير\SpecialChar menuseparator
1174 \begin_inset space ~
1178 \begin_inset space ~
1186 \begin_inset space ~
1190 \begin_inset space ~
1194 وبمجرد العثور على الكلمة أو الجملة المطلوبة،
1201 النقر على زر استبدال سيستبدل الكلمة المحددة بالكلمة أو الجملة التي كتبتها في حقل استبدال بـ .
1202 وتستطيع النقر على زر بحث التالي لتخطي الكلمة الحالية.
1203 أما النقر على زر استبدال الكل سوف يستبدل كل الكلمة المراد استبدالها بشكل آلي.
1204 إن خيار حالة الأحرف يمكن استخدامه إذا كنت تريد أن يراعي البحث حالة الأحرف الانجليزية (Capital،
1207 لن تجد وظيفة البحث كلمة Test إذا كتبت الكلمة في حقل البحث بحروف صغيره test .
1208 الخيار التالي هو كلمات كاملة فقط،
1209 فمثلا عند البحث عن كلمة يذهب لن يتوقف عند كلمة يذهبون لأنها غير مطابقة لها تماما في عدد الأحرف.
1215 أيضا ميزة البحث المتقدم والذي يحتوي على خيارات أكثر،
1216 ويمكن الاطلاع على تفاصيل أكثر عنه في قسم
1219 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1221 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1229 \begin_layout Standard
1235 \begin_inset space \space{}
1239 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1243 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1247 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal text.
1248 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an inset and pressing
1252 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1259 \begin_layout Standard
1260 استخدام الاختصار Ctrl+A سيحدد كامل النص في المستند.
1261 بينما لو استخدمنا نفس الاختصار أثناء وجود المؤشر داخل مربع إدارج (ملاحظة مظللة مثلا) فإنه سيتم تحديد ما في داخل الملاحظة المظللة فقط.
1262 لكن النقر على Ctrl+A بشكل متتالي سيجعل التحديد يشمل مربع الإدراج،
1263 ثم سيقوم بتحديد كامل المستند.
1264 أخيرا إذا استخدمنا المفاتيح Ctrl+Alt+A فإن كامل المستند سيتم تحديده بالإضافة إلى أن المؤشر سيصبح في نهاية المستند.
1267 \begin_layout Section
1269 \begin_inset Index idx
1274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1281 \begin_inset Index idx
1286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1293 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1295 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1302 \begin_layout Standard
1304 يمكنك العودة عنه بسهولة.
1306 يخصص سعة كبيرة في الذاكرة المؤقتة لخاصيتي تراجع/تكرار.
1309 تحرير\SpecialChar menuseparator
1318 في شريط الأدوات لتراجع عن خطأ ما.
1319 وإذا تراجعت أكثر من اللازم يمكنك استخدام
1345 تحرير\SpecialChar menuseparator
1358 إن خاصية التراجع والتكرار محدودة بمئة خطوة لعدم استهلاك الذاكرة.
1361 \begin_layout Standard
1362 لاحظ أنك إذا تراجعت عن جميع الخطوات،
1363 أي إلى آخر عملية حفظ،
1364 فإن مفتاح الترجع سيصبح غير مفعل،
1365 ولن تستطيع للأسف التراجع عن عمليات قمت بها سابقا.
1368 \begin_layout Standard
1369 عمليتي التراجع و التكرار تعمل مع أي شيء في \SpecialChar LyX
1371 لكنها لا تسمح بالتراجع حرف حرف،
1372 وإنما التراجع عن كامل المقطع.
1375 \begin_layout Section
1377 \begin_inset Index idx
1382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1391 \begin_layout Standard
1392 هذه أهم عمليات أساسية تقوم بها الفارة
1395 \begin_layout Enumerate
1400 \begin_layout Itemize
1401 عند النقر بزر الفارة الأيسر في أي مكان من المستند في نافذة التحرير.
1402 نقرة واحدة يصبح المؤشر داخل النص،
1403 وعند النقر على الكلمة نقرتين يم تحديد الكلمة،
1404 وعند النقر عليها ثلاث مرات يتم تحديد كامل السطر.
1408 \begin_layout Enumerate
1413 \begin_layout Itemize
1414 ضع المؤشر حيث تريد أن يبدأ التحديد ثم انقر على زر الفارة الأيسر،
1415 ثم اسحب إلى نهاية التحديد وارفع إصبعك عن زر الفارة.
1416 سيقوم \SpecialChar LyX
1417 بتحديد النص بين نقطتي البداية والنهاية اللتين قمت بتحديدهما.
1420 تحرير\SpecialChar menuseparator
1421 نسخ أو Ctrl+C لإنشاء نسخة من النص في الحافظة.
1424 \begin_layout Itemize
1425 ضع المؤشر حيث تريد لصق النص في نافذة التحرير ثم
1427 تحرير\SpecialChar menuseparator
1432 \begin_layout Enumerate
1440 \begin_layout Standard
1441 أنقر بزر الفارة الأيمن على الكائن الذي أدرجته ثم اختر إعدادات.
1442 أيضا اطلع على appropriate القسم في هذا الكتيب للمزيد من التفاصيل.
1446 \begin_layout Section
1448 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1450 name "sec:Navigating"
1455 \begin_inset Index idx
1460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1469 \begin_layout Standard
1471 يعرض عليك عدة طرق للاستكشاف داخل المستندات:
1474 \begin_layout Itemize
1475 قائمة استكشاف تحتوي قائمة بكل أقسام المستند وتستطيع الانتقال لأي منها بالنقر على اسمه.
1478 \begin_layout Itemize
1480 تستطيع الوصول لها عن طريق
1482 عرض\SpecialChar menuseparator
1484 \begin_inset space ~
1489 الخلاصة أو بالنقر على رمز الخلاصة
1492 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1498 \begin_layout Itemize
1499 يمكنك تعيين العلامات الإشارات المرجعية في مستندك عن طريق
1501 استكشاف\SpecialChar menuseparator
1504 العلامات ومن نفس القائمة يمكنك العودة لها.
1505 مع ملاحظة أن هذه العلامات تحفظ بين الجلسات.
1508 \begin_layout Standard
1512 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1517 أو استكشاف\SpecialChar menuseparator
1518 العلامات\SpecialChar menuseparator
1520 \begin_inset space ~
1525 للخلف أو Ctrl+< سوف يعود بك لأخر موقع قمت بالتعديل عليه.
1526 وهذا عملي عندما يكون لديك مستند كبير وتكون في جزء معين منه لمشاهدة شيء ما،
1527 ثم ترغب بالعودة لآخر مكان قمت بتعديله.
1530 \begin_layout Standard
1531 أخير بالنقر على زر F5 يتحرك مؤشر الفارة إلى وسط نافذة التحرير.
1534 \begin_layout Subsection
1536 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1538 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
1543 \begin_inset Index idx
1548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1556 \begin_inset Index idx
1561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1570 \begin_layout Standard
1571 في أعلى نافذة الخلاصة توجد قائمة منسدلة،
1572 تستطيع من خلال اختيار عدة أنواع من القوائم،
1574 وقائمة الرسوم التوضيحية وقائمة الجداول وغيرها.
1576 \begin_inset space ~
1580 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1582 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1588 أو الملاحظات ولاستشهادات (أنظر القسم
1589 \begin_inset space ~
1593 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1595 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1603 \begin_layout Standard
1604 إن النقر على أي من محتويات هذه القوائم سوف ينتقل بك إليه.
1607 \begin_layout Standard
1608 عند النقر على أي عنصر بزر الفارة الأيمن سوف يعرض الخيارات والإعدادات الخاصة به،
1609 مثلا النقر على استشهاد معين بزر الفارة الأيمن سوف يظهر خيار إعدادات ليسمح لك بالتعديل على الاستشهاد.
1612 \begin_layout Standard
1613 إن حقل المرشح في أعلى النافذة يسمح لك بتقييد المدخلات التي ستظهر في الخلاصة.
1615 إذا كنت تعرض قائمة الملصقات والمراجع وترغب برؤية مراجع الأقسام الفرعية فقط،
1616 أكتب كلمة sub في المرشح،
1617 عندها سيتم عرض العناصر التي تحتوي هذه الكلمة فقط.
1620 \begin_layout Standard
1623 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow you further to control the display.
1628 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1630 the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the document.
1635 option keeps it in the current view state.
1636 Keeping means that when you have,
1638 the subsections of sections
1639 \begin_inset space ~
1642 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
1643 \begin_inset space ~
1647 the subsections of sections
1648 \begin_inset space ~
1651 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
1656 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1657 \begin_inset space ~
1662 the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1663 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1667 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1671 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1674 \begin_layout Standard
1675 في اسفل نافذة الخلاصة توجد عدة أزرار تسمح لك بالمزيد من التحكم بالعرض،
1676 فالخيار فرز يرتب القائمة الحالية هجائيا.
1677 وبدون هذا الخيار ستظهر عناصر القائمة مرتبة حسب مكان وجودها في المستند.
1680 \begin_layout Standard
1687 يستخدم لتحديث القائمة (وهو غير مهم عادة).
1688 أما بقية الأزرار فتسمح بتغيير موقع عنصر معين في قسم داخل المستند.
1701 يسمحان بالتعديل للأعلى والأسفل مع المحافظة على المستوى،
1706 يمكن نقله للأعلى ليصبح
1710 والقسم الذي قبله ستحول رقمه تلقائيا إلى
1715 وكذلك يمكن نقله للأسفل ليصبح
1732 فيسمحان برفع أو حفظ مستوى القسم للأعلى والاسفل ،
1738 \begin_inset Quotes fld
1742 \begin_inset Quotes frd
1746 \begin_inset Quotes fld
1750 \begin_inset Quotes frd
1753 وبالتالي يتحول رقمه من
1762 وكذلك بالنسبة لزر الخفض،
1763 فعند النقر عليه سيخفض مستوى القسم
1768 \begin_inset Quotes fld
1772 \begin_inset Quotes frd
1776 \begin_inset Quotes fld
1780 \begin_inset Quotes frd
1784 وبالتالي يتحول رقمه من
1795 \begin_layout Standard
1796 بالنقر بزر الفارة الأيمن على قسم في نافذة الخلاصة يمكنك نسخ كامل القسم،
1800 \begin_layout Subsection
1802 \begin_inset Index idx
1807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1817 \begin_layout Standard
1818 لا يملك \SpecialChar LyX
1819 شريط أفقي لأن هيئة صفحات الخرج مثل A
1823 أقل عرضا من شاشة الحاسب الشخصي أو الحاسب المحمول.
1824 وسوف لن تواجه مشكلة في استعراض ملف الخرج إذا كان عرضه أكبر من عرض الشاشة.
1827 \begin_layout Standard
1828 هناك بعض الحالات التي يكون فيها من الضروري وجود شريط التمرير الأفقي.
1832 \begin_layout Itemize
1834 يستخدم في الأجهزة اللوحية الصغيرة
1837 \begin_layout Itemize
1838 يتم تدوير الجهاز اللوحي °
1846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1854 \begin_inset space ~
1867 \begin_layout Itemize
1868 إنشاء عمليات رياضية بأسماء أوامر طويلة
1871 \begin_layout Standard
1872 ولهذه الحالات \SpecialChar LyX
1873 يملك آلية للتنقل داخل المستند.
1874 مثلا عند تقلص شاشة \SpecialChar LyX
1875 أثناء تحرير جدول عريض
1876 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1878 reference "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
1884 يمكننا التنقل بين خلاليا الجدول باستخدام مفتاح الجدولة Tab في لوحة لمفاتح أو عن طريق أزرار الأسهم.
1887 \begin_layout Standard
1888 \begin_inset Float table
1895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1896 \begin_inset Caption Standard
1898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1899 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1901 name "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
1905 اختبار شريط التمرير الأفقي.
1913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1915 \begin_inset Tabular
1916 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="3">
1917 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
1918 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
1919 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
1920 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
1922 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
1925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1931 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
1934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1940 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
1943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1962 \begin_layout Section
1963 الإكمال التلقائي للكلمة
1964 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1966 name "sec:Input-Completion"
1971 \begin_inset Index idx
1976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1983 \begin_inset Index idx
1988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2019 \begin_layout Standard
2023 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently opened.
2024 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that is used to propose completions.
2027 \begin_layout Standard
2030 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
2033 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
2038 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2045 \begin_inset space ~
2049 \begin_inset space ~
2054 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2058 \begin_inset space ~
2063 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2064 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2067 \begin_inset space ~
2073 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and popup completion,
2074 you can set the minimal number of characters a word must have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose if long completions should be abbreviated.
2077 \begin_layout Standard
2081 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are completions available.
2086 key to accept a proposed completion.
2087 If several completions are possible,
2088 a popup is opened showing them.
2089 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys,
2090 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2097 \begin_layout Standard
2100 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the corresponding options for text.
2101 The special math option
2105 enables characters to be composed.
2108 you want to insert the character
2109 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2113 you can then input the characters
2114 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2122 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2125 to a formula to get it.
2126 So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use of the math toolbar.
2127 A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file
2131 that is in \SpecialChar LyX
2132 's installation folder.
2133 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation mark key “!”.
2141 \begin_layout Section
2142 مفاتيح التحكم الأساسية
2143 \begin_inset Index idx
2148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2155 \begin_inset Index idx
2160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2189 \begin_inset Index idx
2194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2227 \begin_layout Standard
2230 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2246 which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
2249 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2253 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in section
2254 \begin_inset space ~
2258 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2260 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
2268 \begin_layout Standard
2275 \begin_inset space ~
2284 \begin_inset space ~
2309 do exactly what you expect them to do.
2313 \begin_layout Labeling
2314 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2318 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2319 LatexCommand nomenclature
2321 description "مفتاح جدولة"
2329 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
2331 If you do not understand this,
2333 \begin_inset space ~
2337 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2339 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2345 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2347 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2354 \begin_inset space ~
2358 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2360 reference "subsec:Lists"
2369 If you are still confused,
2375 \begin_inset Newline newline
2383 key is only used to accept proposed input completions,
2384 to move the cursor in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or Enumerate.
2387 \begin_layout Labeling
2388 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2392 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2393 LatexCommand nomenclature
2395 description "مفتاح الخروج"
2404 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2408 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2413 to cancel operations.
2414 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2417 \begin_layout Labeling
2418 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2425 \begin_inset space ~
2429 \begin_inset space ~
2436 These move the cursor,
2438 to the beginning and end of a line,
2439 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning or end of the file.
2442 \begin_layout Standard
2443 توجد ثلاث مفاتح للتعديل:
2446 \begin_layout Labeling
2447 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2454 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2462 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2466 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2467 LatexCommand nomenclature
2469 description "مفتاح التحكم"
2474 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses,
2475 depending on which keys it is used in combination with:
2479 \begin_layout Itemize
2490 it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2493 \begin_layout Itemize
2504 it moves by words instead of characters.
2507 \begin_layout Itemize
2518 it moves to the beginning and the end of the document,
2523 \begin_layout Labeling
2524 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2531 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2539 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2543 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2544 LatexCommand nomenclature
2546 description "مفتاح علوي"
2551 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select the text between the old and new cursor positions.
2554 \begin_layout Labeling
2555 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2562 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2570 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2574 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2575 LatexCommand nomenclature
2577 description "مفتاح Alt"
2582 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards,
2583 unless your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
2584 If you have both keys,
2585 you will need to try out which one actually performs the
2590 \begin_inset Newline newline
2593 This key does many different things,
2594 but it also activates the
2596 menu accelerator keys
2599 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a menu or menu item,
2600 it selects that menu item.
2604 \begin_layout Standard
2609 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2615 \begin_inset space ~
2619 \begin_inset space ~
2625 \begin_inset space ~
2633 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2637 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2641 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2646 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2652 \begin_inset space ~
2658 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2668 \begin_layout Standard
2675 manual lists all other things bound to the
2683 \begin_layout Standard
2686 You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use \SpecialChar LyX
2688 because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at the bottom of \SpecialChar LyX
2689 's main window which describes the name of the action you have just triggered,
2690 and any existing key bindings for that action.
2691 The \SpecialChar LyX
2692 menus also list the defined key bindings.
2693 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used in this documentation,
2694 so you should not have any problems understanding it.
2696 notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned,
2698 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2706 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2713 followed by a capital
2720 \begin_layout Chapter
2721 أساسيات ليك \SpecialChar LyX
2723 \begin_inset Index idx
2728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2738 \begin_layout Section
2740 \begin_inset Index idx
2745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2755 \begin_layout Subsection
2759 \begin_layout Standard
2762 Before you do anything else,
2763 before you ever start writing a document,
2764 you need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
2765 Different types of documents use different types of spacing,
2770 different documents use different paragraph environments,
2771 and format the title of your document differently.
2774 \begin_layout Standard
2781 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
2782 By setting the document class,
2783 you automatically select these properties,
2784 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
2785 If you don't choose a document class,
2787 picks one for you by default.
2788 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
2791 \begin_layout Subsection
2793 \begin_inset Index idx
2798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2806 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2808 name "sec:Document-Classes"
2815 \begin_layout Standard
2816 تستطيع اختيار نوع المستند عن طريق
2818 مستند\SpecialChar menuseparator
2819 إعدادات\SpecialChar menuseparator
2823 \begin_inset Index idx
2828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2838 اختر نوع المستند الذي تريد،
2839 ثم اضبطه بالخيارات التي تريد.
2842 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2846 \begin_layout Standard
2847 يحتوي ليك على أربعة أنواع من المستندات الأساسية.
2851 \begin_layout Description
2852 مقالة للمقالات البسيطة
2855 \begin_layout Description
2856 تقرير للتقارير البسيطة
2859 \begin_layout Description
2863 \begin_layout Description
2864 رسالة للرسائل بالأسلوب الأمريكي
2867 \begin_layout Standard
2868 هناك أنواع غير قياسية أخرى،
2869 والتي يستخدمها \SpecialChar LyX
2870 إذا كانت إذا كانت ملفات \SpecialChar LaTeX
2872 على الرقم من أن معظم هذه الملفات يتم تركيبها بشكل افتراضي.
2873 وسنستعرض في الأسطر القادمة بعضا منها.
2874 أما إذا أردت مشاهدة قائمة كاملة بكل أنواع المستندات فستجدها في فصل أنواع المستندات الخاصة في كتيب خصائص إضافية:
2877 \begin_layout Description
2878 A&A مقالة حسب نسق وهيئة صحفية علم الفلك والفيزياء الفلكية.
2881 \begin_layout Description
2882 ACS مقالة حسب نسق وهيئة صحفية مجتمع الكيميائيين الأمريكيين.
2885 \begin_layout Description
2886 AGU مقالة حسب نسق وهيئة صحفية اتحاد الجيوفيزيائيين الأمريكيين.
2889 \begin_layout Description
2892 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American Mathematical Society (AMS).
2893 There are three article layouts available.
2894 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc.,
2895 that prepends the section number to the number of the result.
2896 All result-type statements (propositions,
2898 and so on) are sequenced together,
2901 and the like have their own sequence.
2903 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2906 sequential numbering
2907 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2910 scheme does not place the section number with each result,
2911 but numbers them throughout the article in a single sequence.
2912 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
2913 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
2916 \begin_layout Description
2917 Beamer نسق للعروض التقديمية،
2918 وهو الأفضل من بقية حزم العروض التقديمية.
2921 \begin_layout Description
2922 Broadway نسق كتابة الألعاب.
2923 إنه ليس نوع موجود في \SpecialChar LaTeX
2925 لكنه نوع جديد تم إنشاءه في \SpecialChar LyX
2929 \begin_layout Description
2930 Chess نسق للكتابة عن لعبة الشطرنج.
2933 \begin_layout Description
2935 \begin_inset space ~
2938 vitae نوع لإنشاء بيان السيرة
2941 \begin_layout Description
2942 Elsarticle نسق صحيفة مجموعة النشر Elsevier
2945 \begin_layout Description
2946 Foils يستخدم لإنتاج الشفافيات
2949 \begin_layout Description
2950 Hollywood يستخدم في كتابة سكربتات الأفلام الأمريكية.
2951 إنه ليس نوع موجود في \SpecialChar LaTeX
2953 لكنه نوع جديد تم إنشاءه في \SpecialChar LyX
2957 \begin_layout Description
2958 IEEEtran نسق صحيفة معهد الإلكترونيات ومهندسي الإلكترونيات (IEEE)
2961 \begin_layout Description
2962 IOP نسق صحيفة مجموعة نشر معهد الفيزياء
2965 \begin_layout Description
2966 Kluwer نسق صحيفة مجموعة النشر Kluwer
2969 \begin_layout Description
2970 KOMA-Script بديل لنوع المستند القياسي،
2971 ويملك الكثير من المميزات العملية مما جعله الأكثر استخداما لإنتاج الكتب الكبيرة والرسائل العلمية.
2972 (مستخدم في هذا المستند.)
2975 \begin_layout Description
2976 Memoir بديل آخر للنوع القياسي
2979 \begin_layout Description
2980 Powerdot نسق للعروض التقديمية لكنه أقل دعما للصور من Beamer .
2983 \begin_layout Description
2984 REVTeX يستخدم في نشر مقالات مجتمع الفيزياء الأمريكي (APS),
2985 والمعهد الأمريكي للفيزياء (AIP),
2986 ومجتمع البصريات الأمريكي (OSA).
2987 وهذا النوع غير متوافق تماما مع \SpecialChar LyX
2991 \begin_layout Description
2992 Slides نوع قديم يستخدم لإنتاج الشفافيات
2995 \begin_layout Description
2997 \begin_inset space ~
3000 Proceedings نسق صحيفة المجتمع الدولي لمهندسي البصريات (SPIE)
3003 \begin_layout Description
3004 Springer نسق صحيفة مجموعة النشر Springer
3007 \begin_layout Standard
3008 لم نقم بالدخول في تفاصيل كيفية استخدام أنواع المستندات السابقة.
3011 ويمكنك العثور على تفاصيل عن الأنواع غير القياسية في فصل أنواع المستندات غير القياسية في كتيب
3015 سوف نكتفي ببعض الخصائص الأكثر شيوعا لهذه الأنواع.
3018 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3022 \begin_layout Standard
3025 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
3027 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3028 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3032 \begin_inset Index idx
3037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3049 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3053 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3057 If you open a document that uses such a class,
3058 you will receive a warning saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are not installed.
3059 So it may seem that something is wrong.
3062 \begin_layout Standard
3067 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use,
3074 are highly specialized.
3076 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible,
3077 and it includes almost one hundred different layout files,
3078 with a growing number.
3079 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
3080 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed by some document class.
3081 There are just too many of them.
3082 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
3085 \begin_layout Standard
3088 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
3089 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3093 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3097 you just need to install the appropriate package files.
3098 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that document class for a new file.
3100 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
3103 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3110 manual for information on how to install them.
3113 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3119 \begin_layout Standard
3122 Although \SpecialChar LyX
3123 provides support for many different sorts of documents,
3124 it does not include support for every document class people might want to use.
3126 many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
3127 class files to be used for dissertations submitted to those universities.
3128 The \SpecialChar LyX
3129 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3132 users can write their own layout files,
3133 and many users have done so.
3136 Installing New Document Classes,
3144 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3147 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3149 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3151 name "subsec:Modules"
3156 \begin_inset Index idx
3161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3171 \begin_layout Standard
3174 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the chosen document class.
3175 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3176 This is not available in any document class,
3177 so you have to load the corresponding module in the
3183 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3188 \begin_inset Index idx
3193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3203 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what it does.
3206 \begin_layout Standard
3209 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
3210 packages or file format converters that are not always installed by default.
3212 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter,
3213 and it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3214 You can still use the module while editing your file,
3215 but you will not be able to export to PDF or print your document,
3216 since \SpecialChar LyX
3217 will not be able to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3218 file without the missing prerequisites.
3219 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output,
3220 then you need to install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
3223 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3228 \begin_inset Index idx
3233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3241 See section Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3246 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3249 \begin_layout Standard
3252 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3262 Some modules require other modules,
3263 and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3265 will advise you about these things.
3273 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3275 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3277 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
3282 \begin_inset Index idx
3287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3297 \begin_layout Standard
3300 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
3301 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
3303 They are intended to be used in a variety of different documents.
3304 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different documents,
3305 you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3308 a particular document has very special needs,
3309 but you need a specific inset or character style only that one time.
3310 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
3312 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
3314 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3318 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3330 manual for information on how to use it.
3333 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3337 \begin_layout Standard
3338 كل نوع من المستندات لها خصائص افتراضية.
3339 وهنا جدول بسيط يقارن بينها:
3342 \begin_layout Standard
3343 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3349 \begin_layout Standard
3351 \begin_inset Tabular
3352 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3353 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
3354 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3355 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3356 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3357 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3358 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3360 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3364 \begin_inset space ~
3372 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3383 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3394 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3405 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3416 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3425 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3436 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3447 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3450 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3458 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3471 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3480 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3491 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3502 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3513 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3526 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3535 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3546 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3557 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3568 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3581 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3590 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3601 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3612 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3623 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3640 \begin_layout Standard
3641 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3647 \begin_layout Standard
3650 You're probably also wondering what
3651 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3655 \begin_inset space ~
3659 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3663 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
3664 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
3670 the rest do not and begin instead with the
3675 Some document classes,
3676 such as the ones for letters,
3677 don't use any section headings.
3698 We will describe these headings fully in section
3701 \begin_inset space ~
3705 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3707 reference "subsec:Headings"
3715 \begin_layout Subsection
3717 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3719 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
3724 \begin_inset Index idx
3729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3737 \begin_inset Index idx
3742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3752 \begin_layout Standard
3755 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
3757 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3764 \begin_inset space ~
3772 \begin_inset space ~
3778 you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated list.
3779 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
3780 doesn't support special options you want to use for your document.
3781 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
3782 -class and its options,
3783 you have to read its manual.
3786 \begin_layout Standard
3792 \begin_inset space ~
3799 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3805 \begin_inset space ~
3810 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
3811 You can choose between the following five options:
3814 \begin_layout Labeling
3815 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3820 يستخدم أسلوب الصفحة الافتراضي لهذا المستند.
3823 \begin_layout Labeling
3824 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3829 بدون ترقيم للصفحات أو عناوين.
3832 \begin_layout Labeling
3833 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3841 \begin_layout Labeling
3842 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3847 ترقيم للصفحات وفصول وأقسام مرقمة.
3848 وهذا يتوقف على الحد الأعلى من المستويات الذي يسمح به نوع المستوى المستخدم.
3851 \begin_layout Labeling
3852 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3857 هذا يسمح لك بتخصيص كامل للراس والتذييل إذا كنت ركبت حزمة
3862 \begin_inset Index idx
3867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3875 والتي شرحت بشكل مفصل في القسم
3876 \begin_inset space ~
3880 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3882 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
3890 \begin_layout Standard
3893 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
3896 \begin_inset space ~
3900 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3902 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
3910 \begin_layout Subsection
3912 \begin_inset Index idx
3917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3925 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3927 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
3934 \begin_layout Standard
3935 يمكن أن تجد الخيارات التالية في
3938 \begin_inset space ~
3945 مستند\SpecialChar menuseparator
3949 \begin_inset Index idx
3954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3964 \begin_layout Labeling
3965 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
3969 \begin_inset space ~
3974 ما هو حجم ورق الطباعة المتاح.
3979 \begin_layout Itemize
3985 \begin_layout Itemize
3991 \begin_layout Itemize
3997 \begin_layout Itemize
4003 \begin_layout Itemize
4011 \begin_layout Itemize
4014 ياباني B0 – ياباني B6
4017 \begin_layout Itemize
4024 \begin_layout Labeling
4025 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4031 To choose whether to output as
4042 \begin_layout Labeling
4043 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4048 \begin_inset space ~
4053 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4054 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4057 \begin_layout Subsection
4059 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4061 name "subsec:Margins"
4066 \begin_inset Index idx
4071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4079 \begin_inset Index idx
4084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4093 \begin_layout Standard
4096 Paper margins are set in the menu
4098 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4103 \begin_inset Index idx
4108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4118 \begin_layout Standard
4121 If you use a KOMA-Script document class,
4122 you can use the default settings because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking the paper format and the font size into account.
4125 \begin_layout Subsection
4129 \begin_layout Standard
4132 If you change a document class,
4139 That includes the paragraph environments.
4140 Some paragraph environments are standard,
4141 in so far as all of the document classes have them;
4142 but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4143 If this is the case,
4144 and you change the document class,
4146 will mark the paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4147 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4151 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4155 The name of the style is retained,
4156 in case you should want to go back to the old class.
4157 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting,
4158 so you will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraphs manually to a style present in your new document class.
4161 \begin_layout Section
4162 بادئة الفقرة والفاصلة
4163 \begin_inset Index idx
4168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4178 \begin_layout Subsection
4180 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4182 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4189 \begin_layout Standard
4192 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments,
4193 we'd like to say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4196 \begin_layout Standard
4199 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4200 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4201 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4202 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4206 paragraph of a section,
4217 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4218 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document language than English.
4220 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
4223 \begin_layout Standard
4226 The space between paragraphs,
4227 like the line spacing,
4228 the space between headings and text —
4230 all the spacing for just about everything —
4231 is pre-coded into \SpecialChar LyX
4234 you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4238 these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a range.
4241 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures fit on a page with text,
4242 so that sections don't start at the bottom of a page,
4247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4251 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
4252 goes to produce a printable file.
4258 pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4260 gives you the ability globally to change
4264 these pre-coded spacings.
4265 We will explain more later.
4268 \begin_layout Subsection
4270 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4272 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4277 \begin_inset Index idx
4282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4292 \begin_layout Standard
4302 \begin_inset space ~
4310 \begin_inset space ~
4317 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4322 \begin_inset Index idx
4327 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4336 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs,
4340 \begin_layout Subsection
4344 \begin_layout Standard
4347 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4350 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4352 \begin_inset space ~
4357 dialog and toggle the
4360 \begin_inset space ~
4365 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4370 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4376 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation,
4377 this button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling this).
4380 \begin_layout Standard
4383 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4386 \begin_layout Subsection
4388 \begin_inset Index idx
4393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4403 \begin_layout Standard
4408 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4412 \begin_inset Index idx
4417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4427 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4430 \begin_inset space ~
4439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4442 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4449 \begin_inset Index idx
4454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4463 installed to use this feature.
4468 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
4470 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4472 \begin_inset space ~
4477 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing is normally defined in the environment's style.
4480 \begin_layout Section
4482 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4484 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4489 \begin_inset Index idx
4494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4502 \begin_inset Index idx
4507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4516 \begin_layout Subsection
4520 \begin_layout Standard
4523 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4526 \begin_layout Standard
4536 } \SpecialChar ldots
4546 \begin_inset Newline newline
4549 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
4551 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
4553 or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally alien to you,
4554 we urge you to read the
4563 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4566 \begin_layout Standard
4569 A paragraph environment is simply a
4570 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4574 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4577 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4578 This can include a particular style of font,
4585 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4589 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4592 the different environments inside one another,
4593 allowing one environment to inherit some of the properties of another.
4594 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy tab stops,
4595 on the fly margin adjustment,
4596 and other hangovers from the days of typewriters.
4597 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular document type.
4598 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
4601 \begin_layout Standard
4604 To choose a new paragraph environment,
4605 use the pull-down box
4608 \begin_inset Graphics
4609 filename ../clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4617 at the left end of the toolbar.
4619 will change the environment of the
4623 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4624 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if you select them before choosing the new environment.
4628 \begin_layout Standard
4639 create a new paragraph using the
4643 paragraph environment.
4645 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4649 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4652 because if you are in one of these environments:
4655 \begin_layout Itemize
4661 \begin_layout Itemize
4667 \begin_layout Itemize
4673 \begin_layout Itemize
4679 \begin_layout Itemize
4685 \begin_layout Itemize
4691 \begin_layout Itemize
4697 \begin_layout Standard
4701 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
4706 rather than resetting it to
4711 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
4712 \begin_inset space ~
4716 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4718 reference "sec:Nesting"
4726 \begin_layout Subsection
4730 \begin_layout Standard
4733 The default paragraph environment is
4738 It creates a plain paragraph.
4740 resets the paragraph environment,
4741 this is the one it chooses.
4743 the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in this manual) are in the
4750 \begin_layout Standard
4753 You can nest a paragraph using the
4757 environment in just about anything else,
4758 but you can't really nest anything in a
4765 \begin_layout Subsection
4767 \begin_inset Index idx
4772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4782 \begin_layout Standard
4785 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
4786 title page has three parts:
4788 the name(s) of the author(s) and a
4789 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4793 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4796 for thanks or contact information.
4797 For certain types of documents,
4799 places all of this on a separate page along with today's date.
4800 For other types of documents,
4802 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4806 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4809 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
4813 \begin_layout Standard
4817 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph environments
4832 Here's how you use them:
4835 \begin_layout Itemize
4838 Put the title of your document in the
4845 \begin_layout Itemize
4848 Put the author name in the
4855 \begin_layout Itemize
4858 If you want the date to have a certain appearance,
4859 want to use a fixed date,
4860 or want other text to appear in place of today's date,
4861 put that text in the
4866 Note that using this environment is optional.
4867 If you don't provide any,
4869 will automatically insert today's date.
4870 If you don't want a date,
4873 Suppress default date on front page
4877 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4878 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
4880 \begin_inset space ~
4888 \begin_layout Standard
4891 You can use footnotes to insert
4892 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4896 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4899 or contact information.
4902 \begin_layout Subsection
4904 \begin_inset Index idx
4909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4916 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4918 name "subsec:Headings"
4925 \begin_layout Standard
4928 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
4930 takes care of the numbering for you.
4933 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4935 \begin_inset Index idx
4940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4950 \begin_layout Standard
5005 أنواع من العناوين الجانبية المرقمة.
5009 \begin_layout Enumerate
5015 \begin_layout Enumerate
5021 \begin_layout Enumerate
5027 \begin_layout Enumerate
5033 \begin_layout Enumerate
5039 \begin_layout Enumerate
5045 \begin_layout Enumerate
5051 \begin_layout Standard
5055 labels each heading with a series of numbers,
5056 separated by periods.
5057 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
5058 Unlike the other headings,
5059 parts are numbered with Latin letters.
5062 \begin_layout Standard
5065 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
5067 suppose you're writing a book.
5068 You group the book into chapters.
5070 does a similar grouping:
5073 \begin_layout Itemize
5074 الجزء ينقسم إلى فصول أو أقسام
5077 \begin_layout Itemize
5078 الفصل ينقسم إلى أقسام
5081 \begin_layout Itemize
5082 القسم ينقسم إلى أقسام فرعية
5085 \begin_layout Itemize
5086 القسم الفرعي ينقسم إلى أقسام تحت فرعية
5089 \begin_layout Itemize
5090 القسم تحت الفرعي ينقسم إلى فقرات
5093 \begin_layout Itemize
5094 الفقرة تنقسم إلى فقرات فرعية
5097 \begin_layout Standard
5100 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
5103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5110 Not all document types use the
5114 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
5119 is the top-level heading.
5127 \begin_layout Standard
5135 environment to label a new sub-subsection,
5137 labels it with its number,
5138 along with the number of the subsection,
5141 chapter that it's in.
5143 the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the label
5144 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5148 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5154 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5155 العناوين غير المرقمة
5156 \begin_inset Index idx
5161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5171 \begin_layout Standard
5174 The unnumbered section headings have a
5175 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5179 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5182 at the end of their name.
5183 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in the table of contents,
5185 \begin_inset space ~
5189 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5199 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5201 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5203 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
5210 \begin_layout Standard
5213 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear in the Table of Contents.
5215 this doesn't remove any of the levels;
5216 that's preset in the document class.
5217 Just as certain classes start with
5232 not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5242 This is something you can change.
5245 \begin_layout Standard
5250 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5256 \begin_inset Index idx
5261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5273 \begin_inset space ~
5277 \begin_inset space ~
5282 you will see two counters.
5287 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
5288 numbers a section heading.
5289 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table of contents.
5292 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5294 \begin_inset Index idx
5299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5307 \begin_inset Argument 1
5310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5319 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5321 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5328 \begin_layout Standard
5331 Some section or chapter titles,
5334 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5336 if the header of the page is set to show the current section title,
5337 a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5340 \begin_layout Standard
5344 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5345 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5346 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5347 To specify a short title,
5348 set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5350 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
5352 \begin_inset space ~
5358 This will insert a box labeled
5359 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5363 \begin_inset space ~
5367 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5370 which you can use to enter the short title text.
5371 This also works for captions inside floats.
5372 There can only be one short title per title.
5375 \begin_layout Standard
5378 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5381 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5385 \begin_layout Standard
5388 The following information applies to all section headings:
5391 \begin_layout Itemize
5392 لا تستطيع التفريخ داخلها.
5395 \begin_layout Itemize
5396 لا تستطيع إضافة ملاحظة هامشية داخلها.
5399 \begin_layout Itemize
5400 لا تستطيع إدراج معادلة رياضية فيها.
5403 \begin_layout Itemize
5404 لا تستطيع إدراج ملصق أو إشارة مرجعية لرقمها.
5407 \begin_layout Subsection
5411 \begin_layout Standard
5415 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5431 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5432 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5433 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below the text they contain.
5434 They also allow nesting,
5444 as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5447 \begin_layout Standard
5450 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments:
5459 when you start a new paragraph.
5461 you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5465 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5468 once you are done typing in that poem,
5469 you have to change back to the
5473 environment yourself.
5476 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5477 الاقتباس والاقتباس الطويل
5478 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5485 \begin_inset Index idx
5490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5499 \begin_layout Standard
5502 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments,
5503 it's time for the differences.
5512 are identical except for one difference:
5517 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5526 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5529 \begin_layout Standard
5532 Here's an example of the
5548 extending this line out further and further until it wraps.
5549 See – no indentation!
5555 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5557 there's no indentation,
5558 but there is extra space between me and the other paragraph.
5561 \begin_layout Standard
5564 Here's another example,
5572 \begin_layout Quotation
5581 you will see the indentation.
5582 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting the first line,
5587 is the environment for you!
5593 you were quoting other text.
5596 \begin_layout Quotation
5599 Here's a new paragraph.
5600 I could ramble on and on,
5601 like a politician at election time.
5607 \begin_layout Standard
5610 As the examples show,
5615 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5616 They should put quotes in the
5621 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5625 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5628 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5630 \begin_inset Index idx
5635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5643 \begin_inset Index idx
5648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5655 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5664 \begin_layout Standard
5670 is a paragraph environment for poetry,
5681 \begin_inset Newline newline
5684 Which I did not rehearse!
5690 It could be much worse.
5691 This line could be long,
5694 so very long that it wraps around.
5695 It looks okay on screen,
5696 but in the printed version,
5697 the extra lines are indented a bit more than the first.
5699 so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5707 \begin_inset Newline newline
5710 And make things look fine
5711 \begin_inset Newline newline
5719 arg "newline-insert newline"
5725 \begin_layout Standard
5733 does not indent both margins.
5734 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5735 To separate the individual lines of a stanza,
5741 arg "newline-insert newline"
5747 \begin_layout Subsection
5749 \begin_inset Index idx
5754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5761 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5770 \begin_layout Standard
5774 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds of lists.
5785 labels your list items with bullets or numbers,
5797 lets you provide your own label.
5798 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after describing some general features of all four of them.
5801 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5805 \begin_layout Standard
5808 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments in several ways.
5811 treats each paragraph as a list item.
5820 reset the environment to
5824 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5825 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
5826 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting depth,
5832 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
5838 If you do this at the top level of a list,
5839 it returns you to the
5846 \begin_layout Standard
5849 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5852 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is nested.
5853 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments,
5854 we suggest you read all of section
5857 \begin_inset space ~
5861 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5863 reference "sec:Nesting"
5871 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5873 \begin_inset Index idx
5878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5886 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5895 \begin_layout Standard
5898 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
5902 paragraph environment.
5903 It has the following properties:
5906 \begin_layout Itemize
5909 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
5913 \begin_layout Itemize
5917 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
5920 \begin_layout Itemize
5923 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
5927 \begin_layout Itemize
5930 The items can have any length.
5932 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
5933 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
5940 \begin_layout Itemize
5947 environment inside another
5952 the label changes to a new symbol.
5956 \begin_layout Itemize
5959 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
5962 \begin_layout Itemize
5966 always shows the same symbol on screen.
5969 \begin_layout Itemize
5973 \begin_inset space ~
5977 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5979 reference "sec:Nesting"
5984 for a full explanation of nesting.
5988 \begin_layout Standard
5992 that explanation was also an example of an
6001 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
6004 \begin_layout Standard
6007 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
6008 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
6011 \begin_layout Itemize
6014 The label for the first level
6018 is a large black dot,
6023 \begin_layout Itemize
6026 The label for the second level is a dash.
6030 \begin_layout Itemize
6033 The label for the third is an asterisk.
6037 \begin_layout Itemize
6040 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
6044 \begin_layout Itemize
6047 Back out to the third level.
6051 \begin_layout Itemize
6054 Back to the second level.
6058 \begin_layout Itemize
6061 Back to the outermost level.
6064 \begin_layout Standard
6067 These are the default labels for an
6072 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
6074 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
6077 dialog in the submenu
6083 \begin_inset Index idx
6088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6097 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
6101 \begin_layout Standard
6104 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
6105 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths in section
6106 \begin_inset space ~
6110 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6112 reference "sec:Nesting"
6120 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6122 \begin_inset Index idx
6127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6135 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6137 name "sec:Enumerate"
6144 \begin_layout Standard
6151 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
6152 It has these properties:
6155 \begin_layout Enumerate
6158 Each item has a numeral as its label.
6162 \begin_layout Enumerate
6165 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
6169 \begin_layout Enumerate
6173 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
6176 \begin_layout Enumerate
6183 environment resets the counter to one.
6186 \begin_layout Enumerate
6202 \begin_layout Enumerate
6205 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
6206 Items can have any length.
6209 \begin_layout Enumerate
6212 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
6215 \begin_layout Enumerate
6218 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
6221 \begin_layout Enumerate
6224 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
6228 \begin_layout Standard
6240 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
6242 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
6243 labels the four different levels in an
6250 \begin_layout Enumerate
6253 The first level of an
6257 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
6261 \begin_layout Enumerate
6264 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
6268 \begin_layout Enumerate
6271 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
6275 \begin_layout Enumerate
6278 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
6281 \begin_layout Enumerate
6285 notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth increases.
6289 \begin_layout Enumerate
6292 Back to the third level
6296 \begin_layout Enumerate
6299 Back to the second level.
6303 \begin_layout Enumerate
6306 Back to the outermost level.
6309 \begin_layout Standard
6312 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
6318 \begin_inset space ~
6322 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6324 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6330 Such customization only shows up in the printed version,
6331 not in \SpecialChar LyX
6335 \begin_layout Standard
6338 There is more to nesting
6342 environments than we've stated here.
6343 You should read section
6344 \begin_inset space ~
6348 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6350 reference "sec:Nesting"
6355 to learn more about nesting.
6358 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6360 \begin_inset Index idx
6365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6375 \begin_layout Standard
6378 Unlike the previous two environments,
6383 list has no fixed label.
6387 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6391 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6394 of the first line as the label.
6398 \begin_layout Description
6400 هذا مثال على بيئة الوصف.
6403 \begin_layout Standard
6407 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the rest of the line.
6410 \begin_layout Standard
6414 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6418 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6421 it is meant that the first usage of the
6425 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an item.
6426 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6436 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6443 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6444 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
6446 \begin_inset space ~
6453 \begin_inset space ~
6457 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6459 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
6464 for more information.) Here is an example:
6467 \begin_layout Description
6471 \begin_inset space ~
6475 This one shows how to use a
6478 \begin_inset space ~
6490 \begin_layout Description
6498 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6499 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text that describes it.
6500 It's not a good idea to use a
6504 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6505 You're better off using
6517 paragraphs into them.
6520 \begin_layout Description
6528 environments inside one another,
6529 nest them in other types of lists,
6533 \begin_layout Standard
6536 Notice that after the first line,
6538 indents subsequent lines,
6539 offsetting them from the first line.
6542 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6544 \begin_inset Index idx
6549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6559 \begin_layout Standard
6566 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
6567 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
6571 \begin_layout Standard
6582 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional features.
6583 Here are its properties:
6586 \begin_layout Labeling
6587 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6591 \begin_inset space ~
6594 labels \SpecialChar LyX
6596 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6600 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6603 of each line as the item label.
6608 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6609 If you need to use more than one word in an item label,
6610 use a protected space as described above.
6613 \begin_layout Labeling
6614 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6617 margins As you can see,
6619 uses different margins for the item label and the body of the item text.
6620 The body of the text has a larger left margin,
6621 which is equal to the default label width plus a little extra space.
6625 \begin_layout Labeling
6626 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6630 \begin_inset space ~
6633 width \SpecialChar LyX
6634 uses the width of the label,
6635 or the default width,
6637 If the label width is larger,
6639 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6643 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6646 into the first line.
6648 the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left margin of the rest of the item text.
6651 \begin_layout Labeling
6652 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6656 \begin_inset space ~
6659 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all items in a
6663 environment has the same left margin.
6664 \begin_inset Newline newline
6667 To change the default width,
6668 select all items in the list.
6671 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
6673 \begin_inset space ~
6678 dialog (toolbar button
6683 arg "layout-paragraph"
6692 \begin_inset space ~
6697 determines the default label width.
6698 You can use the text of your largest label here,
6699 but you can also use the letter
6700 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6704 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6707 multiple times instead.
6708 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
6711 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6715 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6718 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6721 \begin_inset space ~
6726 every time you alter a label in a
6731 \begin_inset Newline newline
6734 The predefined default width is the length of
6735 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6739 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6743 \begin_inset space ~
6749 \begin_layout Standard
6756 list the same way as the
6761 When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes it.
6766 environment gives you another way to do this,
6767 using a different overall layout.
6770 \begin_layout Standard
6777 lists inside one another,
6778 nest them in other types of lists,
6780 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6782 \begin_inset space ~
6786 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6788 reference "sec:Nesting"
6793 to learn about nesting.
6796 \begin_layout Standard
6799 There is yet another feature of the
6804 As you can see in the examples,
6806 left-justifies the item labels by default.
6807 You can use additional
6811 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
6812 justifies the item label.
6817 are documented in section
6818 \begin_inset space ~
6822 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6824 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
6830 Here are some examples:
6833 \begin_layout Labeling
6834 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6837 Left The default for
6844 \begin_layout Labeling
6845 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6848 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6855 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6858 \begin_layout Labeling
6859 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6862 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6866 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6873 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6876 \begin_layout Subsection
6878 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6880 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6885 \begin_inset Index idx
6890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6900 \begin_layout Standard
6903 The features described in this section require that the module
6905 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6907 is loaded in the document settings.
6908 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
6916 \begin_inset Index idx
6921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6931 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6932 الترقيم العددي المخصص
6933 \begin_inset Index idx
6938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6949 \begin_layout Standard
6953 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional argument (menu
6955 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6958 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6959 There you add the command
6962 \begin_layout Standard
6971 \begin_layout Standard
6989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6992 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
6995 \begin_inset space ~
6999 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7001 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
7015 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
7022 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
7023 For capital Roman numerals replace
7035 in the command above.
7036 For Arabic numerals use
7044 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7048 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7051 items with capital or small Latin letters use
7067 \begin_layout Standard
7071 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7081 You can only number 26
7082 \begin_inset space ~
7085 items with Latin letters,
7086 because this numbering is limited to single letters.
7094 \begin_layout Standard
7097 To change the numbering for the list sublevels,
7098 replace the 'i' in the command by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi,
7104 \begin_layout Standard
7105 هنا قائمة بالترقيم المخصص:
7108 \begin_layout Enumerate
7109 \begin_inset Argument 1
7112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7138 \begin_layout Enumerate
7139 \begin_inset Argument 1
7142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7165 \begin_layout Enumerate
7170 \begin_layout Enumerate
7171 \begin_inset Argument 1
7174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7198 \begin_layout Enumerate
7199 \begin_inset Argument 1
7202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7228 \begin_layout Standard
7231 For this list these commands were used:
7234 \begin_layout Standard
7246 \begin_inset Newline newline
7254 \begin_inset Newline newline
7262 \begin_inset Newline newline
7272 \begin_layout Standard
7281 makes the label emphasized and
7290 \begin_layout Standard
7293 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7303 When you change the label of a list level,
7304 it will be used for all following lists until you change the definition.
7312 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7314 \begin_inset Index idx
7319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7330 \begin_layout Standard
7333 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
7336 \begin_layout Enumerate
7337 \begin_inset Argument 1
7340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7359 \begin_inset Note Note
7362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7365 goes back to default numbering
7373 \begin_layout Enumerate
7377 \begin_layout Standard
7381 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
7385 \begin_layout Standard
7388 To resume an enumeration,
7394 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
7395 to indicate that it is a resumed list and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
7400 \begin_layout Standard
7403 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7413 If there is no previous enumeration to resume,
7414 you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
7423 \begin_layout Standard
7426 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the next one.
7427 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
7428 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item of a normal enumeration.
7433 \begin_layout Standard
7440 \begin_layout Standard
7447 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
7451 \begin_layout Enumerate
7455 \begin_layout Enumerate
7459 \begin_layout Standard
7460 الترقيم العددي يبدأ بالقيمة المعطاة:
7463 \begin_layout Enumerate
7464 \begin_inset Argument 1
7467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7483 الترقيم العددي يبدأ من 4
7486 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7488 \begin_inset Index idx
7493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7503 \begin_layout Standard
7506 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items of a list.
7507 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
7510 \begin_layout Itemize
7514 \begin_layout Itemize
7518 \begin_layout Standard
7521 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item of the list.
7522 Add there the command
7526 to get no additional list space like in this example:
7529 \begin_layout Itemize
7530 \begin_inset Argument 1
7533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7552 \begin_layout Itemize
7556 \begin_layout Itemize
7560 \begin_layout Standard
7563 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7571 \begin_inset Index idx
7576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7586 For more information see its documentation
7590 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7600 \begin_layout Standard
7603 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing and indentation.
7604 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7605 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7608 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7611 \begin_layout Enumerate
7612 \begin_inset Argument 1
7615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7637 \begin_layout Enumerate
7638 مع عكس المسافة البادئة
7641 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7643 \begin_inset Index idx
7648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7658 \begin_layout Standard
7661 You can also change the style of description lists.
7665 \begin_layout Standard
7672 \begin_layout Standard
7675 changes the description label font,
7679 \begin_layout Standard
7686 \begin_layout Standard
7689 sets the list style.
7692 \begin_layout Standard
7695 An example where the command
7698 \begin_layout Standard
7708 \begin_layout Standard
7714 \begin_layout Description
7718 \begin_inset space ~
7723 \begin_inset Argument 1
7726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7749 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules,
7750 therefore ionizing them.
7753 \begin_layout Description
7757 \begin_inset space ~
7761 In computer science,
7762 reference counting is a technique of storing the number of references,
7764 or handles to a resource such as an object,
7766 disk space or other resource.
7769 \begin_layout Standard
7772 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7780 \begin_inset Index idx
7785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7795 For more information see its documentation
7798 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7808 \begin_layout Subsection
7810 \begin_inset Index idx
7815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7824 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7825 العنوان والعنوان الأيمن:
7829 \begin_layout Standard
7832 Although \SpecialChar LyX
7833 has document classes for letters,
7834 we've also created two paragraph environments called
7841 \begin_inset space ~
7847 To use the letter class,
7848 you need to use specific paragraph environments in a specific order,
7849 otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
7850 gags on the document.
7859 \begin_inset space ~
7864 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7865 You can even nest them inside other environments,
7866 though you can't nest anything in them.
7869 \begin_layout Standard
7873 you're not limited to using
7880 \begin_inset space ~
7889 \begin_inset space ~
7896 is useful for creating article titles like those used in some European academic papers.
7899 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7901 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7903 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7910 \begin_layout Standard
7917 environment formats text in the style of an address,
7918 which is also used for the opening and signature in some countries.
7923 \begin_inset space ~
7928 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address,
7929 which is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7930 Here's an example of each:
7933 \begin_layout Right Address
7935 \begin_inset Newline newline
7939 \begin_inset Newline newline
7943 \begin_inset Newline newline
7950 \begin_layout Standard
7956 \begin_inset space ~
7962 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin,
7963 which \SpecialChar LyX
7964 sets to fit the largest block of text on a single line.
7965 Here's an example of the
7972 \begin_layout Address
7974 \begin_inset Newline newline
7978 \begin_inset Newline newline
7984 \begin_layout Standard
7995 \begin_inset space ~
8000 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
8005 in either of these environments,
8007 resets the nesting depth and sets the environment to
8022 and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
8033 arg "newline-insert newline"
8040 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
8041 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
8043 \begin_inset space ~
8047 \begin_inset space ~
8052 ) to start a new line in an
8059 \begin_inset space ~
8067 \begin_layout Subsection
8071 \begin_layout Standard
8074 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography or list of references.
8076 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
8079 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8081 \begin_inset Index idx
8086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8097 \begin_layout Standard
8104 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
8106 you could use this environment anywhere,
8107 but you really should only use it at the beginning of the document,
8110 don't bother trying to nest
8124 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
8125 The book document classes ignores the
8130 and it's utterly silly to use
8134 in a letter document class.
8137 \begin_layout Standard
8144 environment does several things for you.
8146 it puts the centered label
8147 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8151 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8155 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical space.
8157 it typesets everything in a smaller font,
8158 just as you'd expect.
8160 it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and the subsequent text.
8162 that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
8164 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are using.
8167 \begin_layout Standard
8170 Starting a new paragraph by entering
8174 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8175 The new paragraph will still be in the
8181 you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you finish entering the abstract of your document.
8184 \begin_layout Standard
8185 \begin_inset Float figure
8192 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8194 \begin_inset Graphics
8195 filename ../clipart/Abstract.pdf
8202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8203 \begin_inset Caption Standard
8205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8206 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8208 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
8225 \begin_layout Standard
8228 We would love to demonstrate the
8233 but since this document is in the
8234 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8238 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8243 We inserted it therefore as figure
8244 \begin_inset space ~
8248 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8250 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
8256 If you have never heard of an
8257 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8261 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8265 you can safely ignore this environment.
8268 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8270 \begin_inset Index idx
8275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8282 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8284 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
8291 \begin_layout Standard
8298 environment is used to list references.
8300 you could use this environment anywhere,
8301 but you really should only use it at the end of the document.
8313 \begin_layout Standard
8316 When you first open a
8322 adds a large vertical space,
8323 followed by the heading
8324 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8328 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8332 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8336 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8339 depending on the document class.
8340 The heading is in a large boldface font.
8341 Each paragraph of the
8345 environment is a bibliography entry.
8351 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8352 Each new paragraph is still in the
8359 \begin_layout Standard
8363 usually better way to include references in your document by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
8365 For more information on that,
8366 and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
8367 's bibliography handling,
8368 have a look at section
8371 \begin_inset space ~
8375 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8377 reference "sec:Bibliography"
8385 \begin_layout Subsection
8389 \begin_layout Standard
8393 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
8396 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8397 كود - ليك \SpecialChar LyX
8399 \begin_inset Index idx
8404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8411 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8413 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
8420 \begin_layout Standard
8428 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
8430 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
8435 key as a fixed whitespace.
8439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8455 \begin_inset space ~
8460 instead of an end-of-word marker.
8479 * are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in \SpecialChar LyX
8481 If you need to insert blank lines,
8482 you will still need to use
8487 arg "newline-insert newline"
8508 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8510 when you finish using the
8516 you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
8523 environment inside of others.
8526 \begin_layout Standard
8529 There are a few quirks with this environment:
8532 \begin_layout Itemize
8540 arg "newline-insert newline"
8545 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
8546 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
8550 \begin_inset space \space{}
8562 arg "newline-insert newline"
8570 \begin_layout Itemize
8578 arg "newline-insert newline"
8592 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
8600 \begin_layout Itemize
8603 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
8604 You must put at least one
8608 in any line you want blank.
8614 \begin_layout Itemize
8617 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
8621 since that will insert
8626 You get the typewriter double quotes with
8631 arg "self-insert \""
8637 \begin_layout Standard
8641 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8647 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8653 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8659 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8665 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8668 printf("Hello World!
8673 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8679 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8685 \begin_layout Standard
8688 This is just the standard
8689 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8693 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8700 \begin_layout Standard
8709 such as program source,
8710 shell scripts and so on.
8711 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text as if you used a typewriter
8714 \begin_inset Index idx
8719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8727 For longer parts of programming code,
8728 use the listings inset that is described in the chapter
8730 Program Code Listings
8735 \begin_inset space ~
8743 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8745 \begin_inset Index idx
8750 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8759 \begin_layout Standard
8766 environment is similar to the
8771 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a computer console text.
8776 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
8790 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a protected space) and you can have empty lines.
8804 \begin_layout Itemize
8807 have a certain language and a text style
8810 \begin_layout Itemize
8815 foot- and margin notes,
8819 index- and nomenclature entries,
8824 floats and \SpecialChar TeX
8828 \begin_layout Standard
8831 Because of these properties
8835 works like a typewriter.
8839 \begin_layout Verbatim
8843 \begin_layout Verbatim
8846 The following 2 lines are empty:
8849 \begin_layout Verbatim
8853 \begin_layout Verbatim
8857 \begin_layout Verbatim
8858 Almost everything is allowed in Verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
8863 \begin_layout Standard
8870 environment is identical to
8874 with the difference that spaces appear in the output as the character '
8875 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
8882 \begin_layout Verbatim*
8886 \begin_layout Section
8888 \begin_inset Index idx
8893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8901 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8910 \begin_layout Subsection
8914 \begin_layout Standard
8918 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific properties.
8919 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of another block.
8920 For example you have three main points in an outline,
8921 but point #2 also has two subpoints.
8923 you have a list inside of another list,
8925 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8929 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8935 \begin_layout Enumerate
8939 \begin_layout Enumerate
8944 \begin_layout Enumerate
8945 ترقيم فرعي – عنصر #1
8948 \begin_layout Enumerate
8949 ترقيم فرعي – عنصر #2
8953 \begin_layout Enumerate
8957 \begin_layout Standard
8960 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8961 Nesting an environment is quite simple:
8964 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
8966 \begin_inset space ~
8970 \begin_inset space ~
8978 \begin_inset space ~
8982 \begin_inset space ~
8987 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are nested).
8988 Instead of the menu,
8989 you can also use the toolbar buttons
8994 arg "depth-increment"
9004 arg "depth-decrement"
9022 arg "depth-increment"
9032 arg "depth-decrement"
9038 The change will work on the current selection,
9039 if you have made one (allowing you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once),
9040 or the current paragraph.
9043 \begin_layout Standard
9046 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
9047 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
9048 If it is invalid to do so,
9049 nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
9051 if you change the depth of one paragraph,
9052 it affects the depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
9055 \begin_layout Standard
9058 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
9061 you can nest just about anything inside anything else,
9062 as you're about to find out.
9063 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
9066 \begin_layout Subsection
9067 ما الذي تستطيع تفريخه وما لا تستطيع
9070 \begin_layout Standard
9073 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you,
9074 we need to tell you a little bit more about how nesting works.
9077 \begin_layout Standard
9080 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated than a simple yes or no.
9081 There are three types of paragraph environments:
9084 \begin_layout Itemize
9087 Completely unnestable
9090 \begin_layout Itemize
9094 you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other things inside them.
9097 \begin_layout Itemize
9101 you can nest them into other environments,
9102 but you can't nest anything into them.
9105 \begin_layout Standard
9108 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior,
9109 and which paragraph environments have them:
9112 \begin_layout Description
9116 \begin_inset space ~
9124 \begin_inset space ~
9129 للتفريخ لا يمكن تفريخه داخل غيره.
9130 ولا يمكن التفريخ داخله.
9134 \begin_layout Itemize
9140 \begin_layout Itemize
9146 \begin_layout Itemize
9152 \begin_layout Itemize
9158 \begin_layout Itemize
9165 \begin_layout Description
9167 \begin_inset space ~
9170 كامل يمكن تفريخه داخل غيره.
9171 ويمكن التفريخ داخله.
9175 \begin_layout Itemize
9181 \begin_layout Itemize
9187 \begin_layout Itemize
9193 \begin_layout Itemize
9199 \begin_layout Itemize
9205 \begin_layout Itemize
9211 \begin_layout Itemize
9217 \begin_layout Itemize
9223 \begin_layout Itemize
9229 \begin_layout Itemize
9236 \begin_layout Description
9238 \begin_inset space ~
9241 طفيلي يمكن تفريخه داخل غيره.
9242 ولا يمكن التفريخ داخله.
9246 \begin_layout Itemize
9252 \begin_layout Itemize
9258 \begin_layout Itemize
9264 \begin_layout Itemize
9270 \begin_layout Itemize
9276 \begin_layout Itemize
9282 \begin_layout Itemize
9288 \begin_layout Itemize
9294 \begin_layout Itemize
9300 \begin_layout Itemize
9306 \begin_layout Itemize
9312 \begin_layout Itemize
9318 \begin_layout Itemize
9324 \begin_layout Itemize
9328 \begin_inset space ~
9334 \begin_layout Itemize
9341 \begin_layout Standard
9344 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
9347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9354 Although it is possible,
9356 to nest numbered section headings like
9367 \begin_inset space ~
9371 it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas nested section headings violate this.
9379 \begin_layout Subsection
9385 \begin_inset Index idx
9390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9400 \begin_layout Standard
9403 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments,
9404 but which are affected by nesting anyhow.
9408 \begin_layout Itemize
9412 \begin_layout Itemize
9416 \begin_layout Itemize
9420 \begin_layout Standard
9424 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
9427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9434 Figures and tables in
9438 are not affected by this.
9443 Have a look at section
9446 \begin_inset space ~
9450 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
9452 reference "sec:Floats"
9459 for more information about
9466 \begin_layout Standard
9470 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
9473 or an equation is inline,
9474 it goes wherever the paragraph it is in goes.
9477 \begin_layout Standard
9481 if you have an equation,
9482 figure or table in a
9483 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9487 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9491 it behaves just like a
9492 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9496 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9499 paragraph environment.
9500 You can nest it into any environment,
9501 but you obviously can't nest anything into it.
9504 \begin_layout Standard
9507 Here's an example with a table:
9510 \begin_layout Enumerate
9517 \begin_layout Enumerate
9520 This is (a) and it's nested.
9524 \begin_layout Standard
9525 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9531 \begin_layout Standard
9533 \begin_inset Tabular
9534 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9535 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9536 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9537 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9539 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9548 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9559 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9568 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9585 \begin_layout Standard
9586 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9593 \begin_layout Enumerate
9597 The table is actually nested inside (a).
9601 \begin_layout Enumerate
9607 \begin_layout Standard
9610 If we hadn't nested the table at all,
9611 the list would look like this:
9614 \begin_layout Enumerate
9621 \begin_layout Enumerate
9624 This is (a) and it's nested.
9628 \begin_layout Standard
9629 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9635 \begin_layout Standard
9637 \begin_inset Tabular
9638 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9639 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9640 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9641 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9643 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9652 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9663 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9672 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9689 \begin_layout Standard
9690 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9696 \begin_layout Enumerate
9706 it's not nested at all.
9709 \begin_layout Enumerate
9715 \begin_layout Standard
9718 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested,
9719 but is also the first item of a new list!
9722 \begin_layout Standard
9725 There's another trap you can fall into:
9727 but not going deep enough.
9729 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
9732 \begin_layout Enumerate
9739 \begin_layout Enumerate
9742 This is (a) and it's nested.
9745 \begin_layout Standard
9746 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9752 \begin_layout Standard
9754 \begin_inset Tabular
9755 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9756 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9757 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9758 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9760 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9769 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9780 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9789 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9807 \begin_layout Standard
9808 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9814 \begin_layout Enumerate
9818 The table is actually nested inside Item One,
9826 \begin_layout Enumerate
9832 \begin_layout Standard
9836 item (b) turned into the first item of a new list,
9842 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
9845 figures or equations,
9846 make sure you go to the right depth!
9849 \begin_layout Subsection
9850 الاستخدام والميزات العامة
9853 \begin_layout Standard
9858 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
9861 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9865 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9868 is the innermost possible depth.
9869 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9872 \begin_layout Enumerate
9875 level #1 – outermost
9879 \begin_layout Enumerate
9886 \begin_layout Enumerate
9893 \begin_layout Enumerate
9900 \begin_layout Itemize
9907 \begin_layout Itemize
9918 \begin_layout Standard
9921 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit,
9922 and you can see both of them in the example.
9923 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments,
9924 you can only perform a four-fold nesting with the
9934 if we tried to nest another
9939 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9943 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9947 we would get errors.
9950 \begin_layout Subsection
9952 \begin_inset Index idx
9957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9967 \begin_layout Standard
9970 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9971 We have several examples of nested environments.
9973 we explain how we created the example,
9974 so that you can reproduce them.
9977 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9979 الطية السادسة والتفريخ المختلط
9982 \begin_layout Labeling
9983 \labelwidthstring MMM
9986 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9995 \begin_layout Labeling
9996 \labelwidthstring MMM
9999 #2-a This is level #2.
10000 We created it by using
10005 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10015 arg "depth-increment"
10024 \begin_layout Labeling
10025 \labelwidthstring MMM
10028 #3-a This is level #3.
10040 arg "depth-increment"
10046 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
10052 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10062 arg "depth-increment"
10071 \begin_layout Standard
10080 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10084 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10090 We did this by entering
10095 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10106 arg "depth-increment"
10112 then changing the paragraph environment to
10117 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph —
10118 it also works for the
10135 \begin_layout Standard
10149 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10157 \begin_layout Labeling
10158 \labelwidthstring MMM
10161 #4-a This is level #4.
10167 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10172 and changed the paragraph environment back to
10178 we can't nest anything inside a
10183 which is why we're still at level #4.
10189 keep nesting things inside
10190 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10194 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10201 \begin_layout Labeling
10202 \labelwidthstring MMM
10205 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
10210 \begin_layout Labeling
10211 \labelwidthstring MMM
10214 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
10215 and this is level #6.
10217 you should know how we made these two.
10221 \begin_layout Labeling
10222 \labelwidthstring MMM
10225 #5-b Back to level #5.
10231 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10241 arg "depth-decrement"
10250 \begin_layout Labeling
10251 \labelwidthstring MMM
10259 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10269 arg "depth-decrement"
10275 we're back at level #4.
10279 \begin_layout Labeling
10280 \labelwidthstring MMM
10283 #3-b Back to level #3.
10284 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
10288 \begin_layout Labeling
10289 \labelwidthstring MMM
10292 #2-b Back to level #2.
10297 \begin_layout Labeling
10298 \labelwidthstring MMM
10302 back to the outermost level,
10304 After this sentence,
10309 and change the paragraph environment back to
10316 \begin_layout Standard
10319 We could have also used the
10338 environment in place of the
10343 The example would have worked exactly the same.
10346 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10351 \begin_layout LyX-Code
10354 This is the LyX-Code environment,
10359 \begin_layout LyX-Code
10373 arg "depth-increment"
10380 \begin_inset Newline newline
10384 we will change to the
10392 \begin_layout Enumerate
10403 \begin_layout Enumerate
10406 Notice how the nested
10410 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
10415 but also inherits its font and spacing!
10419 \begin_layout Standard
10422 We ended this example by entering
10428 we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
10432 and reset the nesting depth by using
10437 arg "depth-decrement"
10445 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10449 وبيئة التعداد النقطي والرقمي
10450 \begin_inset Argument 1
10453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10458 Levels and other list environments
10466 \begin_layout Enumerate
10474 paragraph environment.
10475 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
10479 \begin_layout Enumerate
10488 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10498 arg "depth-increment"
10505 what happens if we nest an
10509 environment inside of this one?
10510 It will be at level #3,
10511 but what will its label be?
10516 \begin_layout Itemize
10530 even though it's at level #3.
10532 its label is a bullet.
10533 (We got here by using
10538 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10549 arg "depth-increment"
10555 then changing the environment to
10563 \begin_layout Itemize
10572 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10583 arg "depth-increment"
10589 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
10594 \begin_layout Enumerate
10598 to get to level #5.
10601 we also changed the paragraph environment back to
10606 Notice the type of numbering,
10612 because we are in the
10620 environment (that is,
10636 \begin_layout Enumerate
10643 change the paragraph environment,
10644 but decrease the nesting depth?
10645 What type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
10649 \begin_layout Enumerate
10653 as if you couldn't guess by now,
10659 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10664 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
10667 \begin_layout Enumerate
10675 arg "depth-decrement"
10680 to decrease the depth after the next
10685 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10692 \begin_layout Enumerate
10696 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
10701 \begin_layout Enumerate
10705 Even though we've changed levels,
10707 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral as the label.Why?
10710 \begin_layout Enumerate
10714 even though the nesting depth has changed,
10726 that \SpecialChar LyX
10731 reset the counter for the label.
10735 \begin_layout Enumerate
10743 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10749 arg "depth-decrement"
10755 and we're back to level #2.
10757 we not only changed the nesting depth,
10758 but we also moved back into the twofold-nested
10766 \begin_layout Enumerate
10769 The same thing happens if we do another
10774 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10780 arg "depth-decrement"
10785 sequence and return to level #1,
10786 the outermost level.
10789 \begin_layout Standard
10793 we reset the environment to
10799 the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling \SpecialChar LyX
10809 The number of other
10813 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
10819 The same rule applies for the
10827 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10832 \begin_layout Enumerate
10835 We're going to go totally nuts now.
10836 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples,
10837 nor will we go into the same detail with how we did it.
10847 \begin_layout Standard
10859 arg "depth-increment"
10869 level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created the example in parentheses someplace.
10871 the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
10872 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
10873 Either before or after this,
10874 we will put in the level.
10878 \begin_layout Enumerate
10887 level #1) This is the next item in the list.
10891 \begin_layout Verse
10894 Now we will add verse.
10895 \begin_inset Newline newline
10898 It will get much worse.
10899 \begin_inset Newline newline
10911 arg "depth-increment"
10924 \begin_layout Verse
10929 \begin_inset Newline newline
10932 Bippitey boppitey boo!
10933 \begin_inset Newline newline
10941 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10949 \begin_layout Verse
10952 Here comes a table:
10956 \begin_layout Standard
10959 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10965 \begin_layout Standard
10967 \begin_inset Tabular
10968 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10969 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10970 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10971 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10973 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
10976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10982 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10993 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
10996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11002 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11020 \begin_layout Verse
11028 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11042 arg "depth-increment"
11053 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11061 \begin_inset Newline newline
11070 arg "depth-decrement"
11079 \begin_layout Enumerate
11088 level #1) This is another item.
11089 Note that selecting a
11093 resets the nesting depth to level #1,
11094 so we increased the nesting depth 3 times to put the table inside the
11102 \begin_layout Quotation
11105 We're now ending the
11109 list and changing to
11114 We're still at level #1.
11115 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
11116 The next set of paragraphs is a
11117 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11121 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11124 We will nest both the
11131 \begin_inset space ~
11136 environments inside of this one,
11137 then use another nested
11141 for the letter body.
11147 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
11152 to preserve the depth.
11153 Remember that you need to use
11158 arg "newline-insert newline"
11163 to create multiple lines inside the
11170 \begin_inset space ~
11180 \begin_layout Right Address
11184 \begin_inset Newline newline
11189 \begin_inset Newline newline
11195 \begin_layout Address
11199 \begin_inset space ~
11205 \begin_layout Quotation
11208 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
11209 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11212 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
11214 several of our cows have mysteriously exploded,
11215 creating a backlog in our orders for methane.
11216 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order as soon as possible.
11218 we thank you for your patience.
11221 \begin_layout Quotation
11226 now have a special on beef.
11227 If you are interested,
11228 please return the enclosed pricing and order form with your order,
11229 along with payment.
11232 \begin_layout Quotation
11235 We thank you again for your patience.
11238 \begin_layout Address
11242 \begin_inset Newline newline
11249 \begin_layout Quotation
11252 That ends that example!
11255 \begin_layout Standard
11259 nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
11260 gives you a lot of power with just a few keystrokes.
11261 We could have easily nested an
11283 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
11286 \begin_layout Subsection
11288 \begin_inset Index idx
11293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11301 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11303 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
11310 \begin_layout Standard
11313 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same type.
11314 For example you need two different enumerations:
11317 \begin_layout Enumerate
11322 \begin_layout Enumerate
11327 \begin_layout Enumerate
11331 \begin_layout Standard
11332 \begin_inset Separator plain
11338 \begin_layout Itemize
11344 \begin_layout Standard
11345 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
11351 \begin_layout Enumerate
11355 \begin_layout Enumerate
11359 \begin_layout Enumerate
11363 \begin_layout Standard
11366 To split an existing list into two lists,
11367 set the cursor at the end of a list item and use the menu
11369 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11370 Separated <Name> Above
11374 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11375 Separated <Name> Below
11378 This inserts a plain separator (red line in \SpecialChar LyX
11379 ) and before or behind it the new list.
11380 Inside nested environments,
11381 it is also possible to split the outer environment.
11384 \begin_layout Standard
11387 By right-clicking on a separator one can change it into a paragraph separator (red arrow in LyX).
11388 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
11391 \begin_layout Standard
11395 you get an environment separator when you press
11400 arg "paragraph-break"
11409 environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
11412 \begin_layout Section
11414 ترقيم الصفحات والأسطر الفاصلة
11415 \begin_inset Index idx
11420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11429 \begin_layout Standard
11433 While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors,
11435 offers you more spaces:
11436 spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot be broken at the end of a line.
11437 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are useful.
11440 \begin_layout Subsection
11442 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11444 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
11449 \begin_inset Index idx
11454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11464 \begin_layout Standard
11467 The protected space:
11468 It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
11469 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
11470 ) not to break the line at that point.
11471 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks,
11476 \begin_layout Quote
11479 Further documentation is given in section
11480 \begin_inset Newline newline
11486 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11488 reference "sec:Bibliography"
11496 \begin_layout Standard
11500 it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
11501 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11505 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11509 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11515 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11517 reference "sec:Bibliography"
11525 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11529 A protected space is set with
11531 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11532 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11534 \begin_inset space ~
11544 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
11552 \begin_layout Subsection
11554 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11556 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
11561 \begin_inset Index idx
11566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11576 \begin_layout Standard
11579 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
11581 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11582 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11586 The length units are listed in Appendix
11589 \begin_inset space ~
11593 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11595 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
11603 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11604 مسافة في وسط الكلمة
11605 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11607 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
11612 \begin_inset Index idx
11617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11627 \begin_layout Standard
11630 With the introduction of typewriters,
11631 it became conventional in some countries to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters at the ends of sentences.
11632 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
11633 automatically takes care about this.
11635 you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation followed by a period;
11639 \begin_inset space ~
11643 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11645 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
11653 To insert a normal space,
11656 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11657 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11659 \begin_inset space ~
11669 arg "space-insert normal"
11677 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11679 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11681 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
11686 \begin_inset Index idx
11691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11701 \begin_layout Standard
11705 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11709 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11712 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
11713 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11717 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11721 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide,
11723 inside abbreviations:
11726 \begin_layout Quote
11730 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11734 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
11737 \begin_layout Standard
11740 or between values and units.
11741 Compare for example this:
11742 \begin_inset Newline newline
11746 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11750 \begin_inset Newline newline
11753 10 kg (normal space
11756 \begin_layout Standard
11759 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
11761 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11762 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11764 \begin_inset space ~
11774 arg "space-insert thin"
11782 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11786 \begin_layout Standard
11787 يمكنك إدراج أنواع المسافات التالية:
11790 \begin_layout Description
11794 \begin_inset space ~
11798 \begin_inset space ~
11801 space A line with a
11802 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11806 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
11810 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11813 negative thin space between the arrows.
11816 \begin_layout Description
11820 \begin_inset space ~
11824 \begin_inset space ~
11827 space A line with a
11828 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11832 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
11836 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11839 negative medium space between the arrows.
11842 \begin_layout Description
11846 \begin_inset space ~
11850 \begin_inset space ~
11853 space A line with a
11854 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11858 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
11862 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11865 negative thick space between the arrows.
11868 \begin_layout Description
11872 \begin_inset space ~
11876 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11880 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11884 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
11888 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11892 \begin_inset space ~
11896 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11899 em) space between the arrows.
11902 \begin_layout Description
11906 \begin_inset space ~
11910 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11914 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11918 \begin_inset space \quad{}
11922 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11926 \begin_inset space ~
11930 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11933 em) space between the arrows.
11936 \begin_layout Description
11940 \begin_inset space ~
11944 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11948 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11952 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
11956 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11960 \begin_inset space ~
11964 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11967 em) space between the arrows.
11970 \begin_layout Description
11974 \begin_inset space ~
11978 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11982 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
11987 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11991 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11994 cm space between the arrows.
11997 \begin_layout Standard
12003 \begin_inset space ~
12007 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12009 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
12016 lists the different space sizes.
12019 \begin_layout Standard
12020 \begin_inset Float table
12027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12028 \begin_inset Caption Standard
12030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12031 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12033 name "tab:Width-of-the"
12037 عرض المسافات الأفقية المختلفة.
12045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12047 \begin_inset Tabular
12048 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
12049 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
12050 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
12051 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
12053 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12064 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12077 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12086 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12091 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12101 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12110 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12115 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12125 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12134 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12139 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12149 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12158 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12163 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12167 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
12171 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12181 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12190 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12195 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12205 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12214 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12219 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12229 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12234 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12242 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12247 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12257 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12262 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12270 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12275 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12285 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
12288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12290 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12298 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
12301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12303 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12324 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12326 \begin_inset Index idx
12331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12341 \begin_layout Standard
12344 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
12345 feature for adding extra space in a uniform fashion.
12346 An HFill is actually a variable length space,
12347 whose length always equals the remaining space between the left and right margins.
12348 If there is more than one HFill on a line,
12349 they divide the available space equally between themselves.
12352 \begin_layout Standard
12355 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
12358 \begin_layout Quote
12360 هذا في الاتجاه اليسار
12361 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
12364 هذا في الاتجاه اليمين
12367 \begin_layout Quote
12370 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
12374 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
12380 \begin_layout Quote
12383 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
12387 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
12391 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
12397 \begin_layout Standard
12400 That was an example in the
12406 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
12410 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
12414 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
12417 is one in a standard paragraph.
12418 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text,
12423 sitting in-between the two arrows.
12426 \begin_layout Standard
12429 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
12432 \begin_inset space ~
12437 s in the space dialog:
12438 The following patterns are available:
12441 \begin_layout Standard
12444 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
12448 \begin_inset space ~
12454 \begin_layout Standard
12457 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
12461 \begin_inset space ~
12467 \begin_layout Standard
12470 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
12474 \begin_inset space ~
12480 \begin_layout Standard
12483 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
12487 \begin_inset space ~
12493 \begin_layout Standard
12496 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
12500 \begin_inset space ~
12506 \begin_layout Standard
12509 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
12513 \begin_inset space ~
12519 \begin_layout Standard
12522 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12532 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line,
12537 in the first line in a paragraph,
12540 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
12541 If you need space in this case anyway,
12546 option in the space dialog.
12554 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12556 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12558 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
12563 \begin_inset Index idx
12568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12578 \begin_layout Standard
12581 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
12583 you want to create the following multiple choice question:
12586 \begin_layout Standard
12587 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
12592 What is correct English?:
12593 \begin_inset Newline newline
12597 \begin_inset Newline newline
12601 \begin_inset space ~
12604 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
12605 \begin_inset Newline newline
12609 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
12612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12622 \begin_inset Newline newline
12626 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
12629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12641 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
12647 \begin_layout Standard
12651 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
12652 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12656 \begin_inset space ~
12660 \begin_inset space ~
12664 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12669 you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
12671 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12672 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12676 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two lines and insert
12677 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12681 \begin_inset space ~
12685 \begin_inset space ~
12689 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12692 into the phantom inset (note the space after
12693 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12697 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12701 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
12702 That is why it is named
12703 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12707 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12711 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
12712 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding dimension.
12715 \begin_layout Subsection
12717 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12719 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
12724 \begin_inset Index idx
12729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12739 \begin_layout Standard
12742 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph,
12745 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12746 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12748 \begin_inset space ~
12754 There you find the following sizes:
12757 \begin_layout Standard
12772 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
12773 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
12778 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
12780 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
12781 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
12783 \begin_inset space ~
12790 \begin_inset Index idx
12795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12804 for the paragraph separation.
12805 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
12816 \begin_layout Standard
12824 \begin_inset Index idx
12829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12838 is a variable space,
12839 set so that the space is maximal within one page.
12841 you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
12846 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second one at the bottom,
12847 because the space between them is then maximal.
12857 they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
12861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12867 s are described in section
12868 \begin_inset space ~
12872 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12874 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
12884 If there are several
12889 they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
12890 You can therefore use
12894 s to center text on a page,
12895 or even place text 2/3 down a page.
12898 \begin_layout Standard
12904 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
12907 \begin_inset space ~
12911 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12913 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
12921 \begin_layout Standard
12924 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12936 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of a page,
12937 the space is only added if you have also checked the option
12949 \begin_layout Subsection
12951 \begin_inset Index idx
12956 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12966 \begin_layout Standard
12967 يمكنك تغيير محاذاة الفقرة عن طريق
12969 تحرير\SpecialChar menuseparator
12975 arg "layout-paragraph"
12979 توجد خمسة احتمالات:
12983 \begin_layout Itemize
12991 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
12997 \begin_layout Itemize
13005 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
13011 \begin_layout Itemize
13019 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
13025 \begin_layout Itemize
13033 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
13039 \begin_layout Itemize
13047 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
13053 \begin_layout Standard
13056 The default in most cases is justified alignment,
13057 in which the inter-word spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between the left and right margins.
13058 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory,
13059 and look like this:
13062 \begin_layout Standard
13064 هذه الفقرة محاذاة يمين
13067 \begin_layout Standard
13072 \begin_layout Standard
13079 \begin_layout Subsection
13081 \begin_inset Index idx
13086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13094 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13096 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
13103 \begin_layout Standard
13106 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
13107 does the page breaks in your document,
13108 you can force a page break where you want one.
13109 Normally this will not be necessary,
13110 because \SpecialChar LaTeX
13111 is good at page breaking.
13112 Only if you use a lot of
13118 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
13121 \begin_layout Standard
13124 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished and you have checked in the preview to see if you
13128 have to change the page breaking.
13131 \begin_layout Standard
13134 There are two types of page breaks:
13135 One that ends the page without any special action.
13136 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
13138 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
13139 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
13141 \begin_inset space ~
13148 that is inserted via the menu
13150 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
13151 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
13153 \begin_inset space ~
13159 ends a page but stretches the content of the page,
13160 so that it fills out the complete page.
13161 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page on which only the last few lines are absent.
13164 \begin_layout Standard
13167 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears at the top of a page.
13170 the wrong way to do it.
13172 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables appear at the top of a page (or the bottom,
13173 or on their own page) without having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
13177 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13179 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
13186 to learn more about
13193 \begin_layout Subsubsection
13195 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13197 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
13202 \begin_inset Index idx
13207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13217 \begin_layout Standard
13220 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed directly on the next page,
13221 you can also clear pages while breaking them.
13222 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything,
13223 including unprocessed floats,
13224 from the earlier part of the document are placed after it,
13225 if necessary by adding pages.
13228 \begin_layout Standard
13231 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
13233 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
13234 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
13236 \begin_inset space ~
13242 When you have a two-sided document like a book,
13243 you can use the menu
13245 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
13246 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
13248 \begin_inset space ~
13252 \begin_inset space ~
13257 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand page (odd-numbered),
13258 if necessary by adding a page.
13261 \begin_layout Subsection
13263 \begin_inset Index idx
13268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13275 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13277 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
13284 \begin_layout Standard
13287 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks:
13288 one simply breaks the line.
13289 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
13291 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
13292 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
13294 \begin_inset space ~
13298 \begin_inset space ~
13308 arg "newline-insert newline"
13314 Another type that is inserted via the menu
13316 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
13317 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
13319 \begin_inset space ~
13323 \begin_inset space ~
13333 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
13338 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between the page margins.
13339 This is useful to avoid
13340 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13344 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13347 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
13350 \begin_layout Standard
13353 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
13355 as \SpecialChar LaTeX
13356 is very good at line breaking.
13359 a number of situations where it is necessary to set a line break actively,
13361 in a poem or for an address (see sections
13364 \begin_inset space ~
13368 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13370 reference "sec:Quote"
13377 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13379 reference "sec:Verse"
13389 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13391 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
13401 \begin_layout Subsection
13403 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13405 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
13410 \begin_inset Index idx
13415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13424 \begin_layout Standard
13428 \begin_inset CommandInset line
13439 \begin_layout Standard
13445 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
13446 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
13448 \begin_inset space ~
13453 you can insert horizontal lines.
13454 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline of the current text line or the paragraph.
13455 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
13458 \begin_layout Standard
13462 \begin_inset CommandInset line
13473 \begin_layout Section
13477 \begin_layout Standard
13480 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
13481 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter,
13483 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
13485 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13491 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13493 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
13500 for information on how this is done.
13503 \begin_layout Standard
13506 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard,
13511 dialog via the menu
13513 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
13514 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
13520 \begin_layout Standard
13523 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13533 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
13535 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
13543 \begin_layout Section
13545 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13547 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
13554 \begin_layout Subsection
13556 \begin_inset Index idx
13561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13571 \begin_layout Standard
13574 There are two types of fonts:
13577 \begin_layout Description
13579 \begin_inset space ~
13583 \begin_inset Index idx
13588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13597 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
13598 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13602 characters) in the font.
13603 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are well suited for scaling to any requested size.
13604 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
13605 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
13606 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
13607 \begin_inset Newline newline
13610 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
13611 But to achieve a better quality,
13612 many fonts define several font sizes.
13613 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font sizes than at small ones.
13614 \begin_inset Newline newline
13630 \begin_inset space ~
13638 \begin_layout Description
13640 \begin_inset space ~
13644 \begin_inset Index idx
13649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13659 are defined by bitmap graphics from the start;
13660 so they will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
13662 they don't scale well,
13663 because in order to scale a glyph,
13664 each pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
13665 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an image manipulation program.
13666 In order to mitigate this effect,
13667 bitmap fonts are typically provided in several fixed sizes typically from around 8
13668 \begin_inset space ~
13671 pixels high up to 34
13672 \begin_inset space ~
13675 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
13676 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary to display each glyph;
13677 so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than scalable fonts.
13678 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have to be scaled by doubling pixels,
13680 \begin_inset Newline newline
13683 Bitmap fonts are named
13686 \begin_inset space ~
13691 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
13694 \begin_layout Standard
13697 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are designed for,
13698 while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
13699 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
13700 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs use scalable fonts.
13703 \begin_layout Standard
13706 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document,
13707 look at its document properties.
13710 \begin_layout Standard
13713 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards specifying character styles rather than specifying a particular font.
13715 instead of changing to an italicized version of the current font to emphasize text,
13717 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13721 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13725 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
13727 In \SpecialChar LyX
13729 you do things based on contexts,
13730 rather than focusing on typesetting details.
13733 \begin_layout Subsection
13734 دعم الخطوط في لتيك \SpecialChar LaTeX
13736 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13738 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
13745 \begin_layout Standard
13750 used its own fonts.
13752 you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your operating system,
13753 but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
13755 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
13756 needs some extra information about the fonts,
13757 which have to be provided by additional files and packages.
13758 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared to a word processor.
13759 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts are generally of very good quality,
13760 and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
13761 files are very portable across different machines.
13763 the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
13764 has increased a lot in the meantime;
13765 so you can find packages for many free and commercial fonts.
13767 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface (see section
13768 \begin_inset space ~
13772 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13774 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
13780 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
13781 code in the document preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
13784 \begin_layout Standard
13787 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
13788 engines that are also able directly to access fonts that are installed for your operating system,
13789 namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
13790 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
13792 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
13795 you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font that is installed on your system.
13796 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
13799 \begin_layout Standard
13802 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13813 some fonts might fail due to a legacy (non Unicode) font encoding,
13815 or other font deficiencies;
13816 so you might have to experiment.
13824 \begin_layout Subsection
13826 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13828 name "subsec:Document-Font"
13833 \begin_inset Index idx
13838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13846 \begin_inset Index idx
13851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13861 \begin_layout Standard
13864 You can set the document fonts in the
13866 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13871 \begin_inset Index idx
13876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13890 section of the dialog,
13891 you can specify which font should be used for the three different font shapes —
13896 \begin_inset space ~
13906 and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors for (some) sans
13907 \begin_inset space ~
13910 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
13913 \begin_layout Standard
13921 you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
13922 This requires that you use
13935 as the output format,
13937 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13941 \begin_inset space \space{}
13944 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
13945 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
13946 installed (see section
13949 \begin_inset space ~
13953 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13955 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
13963 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
13965 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
13966 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
13968 \begin_inset space ~
13973 since \SpecialChar LyX
13974 cannot determine the family.
13975 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts,
13976 due to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
13979 cannot determine this in advance,
13980 so you might need to experiment.
13983 \begin_layout Standard
13986 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
13987 fonts (which is the default),
13988 the possible options for the font include
13992 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
13999 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
14000 With LyX's default font encoding,
14001 this is a look-alike of the standard \SpecialChar TeX
14003 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14009 \begin_inset space ~
14015 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14024 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14032 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14036 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14041 European Computer Modern
14044 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14053 some classes set different default fonts.
14056 \begin_layout Standard
14064 it looks pixelated in PDF output,
14065 especially when you read the PDF in a zoomed size.
14069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14072 This problem is less severe if you read PDFs in
14075 \begin_inset space ~
14080 version 6 or later,
14081 because this program includes a special bitmap font renderer.
14086 To get rid of pixelated fonts,
14087 you have to use a vector font.
14088 Depending on how your document should look,
14092 \begin_layout Itemize
14098 \begin_inset space ~
14104 which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
14116 \begin_inset space ~
14121 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14122 community in order to replace
14126 as the default font.
14127 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
14128 Except for some details,
14129 where the appearance was improved,
14133 \begin_inset space ~
14146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14149 One difference is improved kerning.
14157 \begin_layout Itemize
14160 If you do not like the look of
14169 you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided,
14171 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14175 \begin_inset space ~
14181 \begin_inset space ~
14191 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
14192 \begin_inset space ~
14195 serif and typewriter fonts,
14199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14202 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
14203 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14210 \begin_inset space ~
14219 for sans serif text),
14220 or different shapes of the same font,
14222 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14226 \begin_inset space \space{}
14234 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14238 \begin_inset space \space{}
14244 \begin_inset space ~
14252 \begin_inset space ~
14262 but you can also select your own.
14263 \begin_inset Newline newline
14266 The differences between roman,
14270 \begin_inset space ~
14279 fonts are explained in section
14282 \begin_inset space ~
14286 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14288 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14296 \begin_inset Newline newline
14302 \begin_inset space ~
14307 was originally designed for newspapers.
14308 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit into the small newspaper columns.
14312 \begin_inset space ~
14317 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
14320 \begin_layout Standard
14323 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
14339 Some classes provide additional sizes.
14344 depends on the class you are using.
14345 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
14348 \begin_layout Standard
14351 Note that the font size is the
14356 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
14357 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used in footnotes,
14359 and subscripts) by this value.
14360 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
14363 \begin_inset space ~
14369 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
14372 \begin_inset space ~
14376 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14378 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
14386 \begin_layout Standard
14392 \begin_inset space ~
14397 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should be roman,
14399 \begin_inset space ~
14402 serif or typewriter.
14407 selection uses what is preset by the class,
14408 the other selections override this.
14419 but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
14422 \begin_layout Standard
14429 LaTeX font encoding
14431 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14439 \begin_inset Index idx
14444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14456 \begin_inset space ~
14460 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14462 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
14471 you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
14472 Unless you have specific reasons,
14480 \begin_layout Standard
14486 Use Old Style Figures
14490 Use True Small Caps
14493 These are extra features some fonts provide.
14496 Use Old Style Figures
14499 old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures) are used.
14500 Old style figures are the numerals (0
14501 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14505 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
14508 9) with ascenders and descenders,
14509 which makes them fit nicely with lowercase letters.
14512 Use True Small Caps
14514 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made of scaled capitals.
14515 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets;
14516 they generally look better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
14519 \begin_layout Standard
14526 allows users of the languages Chinese,
14528 Korean (CJK) to specify a font to display the script characters.
14532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14535 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14543 \begin_inset Index idx
14548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14557 So this has no effect for the document language
14573 \begin_layout Standard
14578 Enable micro-typographic extensions
14580 activates extensions such as character protrusion and font expansion via the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14587 \begin_inset Index idx
14592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14602 \begin_layout Standard
14607 Disallow line breaks after dashes
14609 outputs en- and em-dashes as literal characters
14613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14616 Or \SpecialChar LaTeX
14618 if the literal character is not supported by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
14624 instead of ligatures (--,
14626 \begin_inset space ~
14630 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14632 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
14643 \begin_layout Standard
14646 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
14650 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
14653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14660 When you choose a new font or font size,
14666 change the screen font!
14667 You will only see a difference in the printed output;
14668 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
14670 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
14672 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
14677 \begin_inset space ~
14681 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14683 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
14696 \begin_layout Subsection
14700 \begin_layout Standard
14703 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
14704 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document font.
14705 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
14706 fonts for your document,
14707 you can explicitly choose a math font in the dialog
14709 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
14714 \begin_inset Index idx
14719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14729 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
14730 automatically selects a math font.
14731 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
14732 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
14733 's default font family
14734 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14740 \begin_inset space ~
14746 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14751 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the document font is available.
14754 \begin_layout Standard
14757 Note that the math font will not be used for
14761 (which is inserted with the shortcut
14771 or by the insertion of the command
14778 Also note that some math fonts are sans
14779 \begin_inset space ~
14783 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs while the math characters do not.
14785 \begin_inset space ~
14788 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
14791 \begin_inset space ~
14799 \begin_inset space ~
14804 in the document font settings.
14807 \begin_layout Standard
14810 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
14811 fonts for the document,
14812 you can only choose for math to use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
14813 font (in most cases
14814 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14820 \begin_inset space ~
14826 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14829 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
14830 variant of the document's class default font (in most cases
14831 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14837 \begin_inset space ~
14843 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14849 \begin_layout Subsection
14850 استخدام انساق محارف مختلفة
14851 \begin_inset Index idx
14856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14863 \begin_inset Index idx
14868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14877 \begin_layout Standard
14880 As we've already seen,
14882 automatically changes the character style for certain paragraph environments.
14884 supports two character styles,
14894 You can activate both of these styles via key bindings,
14899 \begin_layout Standard
14907 do one of the following:
14910 \begin_layout Itemize
14911 انقر على الزر التالي في شريط الأدوات
14920 \begin_layout Itemize
14930 \begin_layout Standard
14933 These commands are all toggles.
14939 style is already active,
14940 they deactivate it.
14943 \begin_layout Standard
14946 One typically uses the
14950 style for proper names.
14953 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14960 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
14962 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14968 \begin_layout Standard
14971 A more widely used character style is the
14976 You can activate (or deactivate —
14977 it's also a toggle) the
14984 \begin_layout Itemize
14985 انقر على الزر التالي في شريط الأدوات
14994 \begin_layout Itemize
15004 \begin_layout Standard
15011 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
15012 -packages use a different font.
15015 \begin_layout Standard
15018 We've been using the
15022 style all over the place in this document.
15023 Here's one more example:
15026 \begin_layout Quotation
15030 Do not overuse character styles!
15033 \begin_layout Standard
15036 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
15037 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
15038 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other,
15039 we should also avoid the common tendency to overuse character styles.
15043 \begin_layout Standard
15046 You can always reset to the default font using the key binding
15058 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
15060 \begin_inset space ~
15063 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
15071 arg "dialog-show character"
15079 \begin_layout Subsection
15080 الضبط الدقيق من نافذة أسلوب النص
15081 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15083 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
15088 \begin_inset Index idx
15093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15102 \begin_layout Standard
15105 There are always occasions when you will need to do some fine-tuning;
15106 so \SpecialChar LyX
15107 gives you a way to create a custom character style.
15109 an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
15111 writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts from ordinary dialog.
15114 \begin_layout Standard
15117 Before we document how to use custom character style,
15118 we want to issue a warning yet again:
15119 Don't overuse character styles!
15121 \begin_inset Newline newline
15124 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
15127 \begin_layout Standard
15130 To use custom character styles,
15133 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
15135 \begin_inset space ~
15138 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
15141 dialog or press the toolbar button
15146 arg "dialog-show character"
15152 There are several boxes in this dialog,
15153 each corresponding to a different font property that you can choose.
15154 You can choose an option for one of these properties,
15158 \begin_inset space ~
15164 which keeps the current state of that property.
15169 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
15170 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph environments all at once.
15173 \begin_layout Standard
15176 The font properties,
15177 and their options (in addition to
15180 \begin_inset space ~
15192 \begin_layout Labeling
15193 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15200 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15204 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15208 The possible options are:
15212 \begin_layout Labeling
15213 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15219 This is the Roman font family.
15220 Normally a serif font.
15221 It's also the default family.
15235 \begin_layout Labeling
15236 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15241 \begin_inset space ~
15248 This is the Sans Serif font family.
15264 \begin_layout Labeling
15265 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15273 This is the Typewriter font family.
15281 arg "font-typewriter"
15291 \begin_layout Labeling
15292 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15298 This corresponds to the print weight.
15303 \begin_layout Labeling
15304 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15310 This is the Medium font series.
15311 It's also the default series.
15314 \begin_layout Labeling
15315 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15323 This is the Bold font series.
15340 \begin_layout Labeling
15341 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15347 As the name implies.
15352 \begin_layout Labeling
15353 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15359 This is the Upright font shape.
15360 It's also the default shape.
15363 \begin_layout Labeling
15364 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15379 s the Italic font shape
15385 \begin_layout Labeling
15386 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15394 This is the Slanted font shape
15396 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
15398 this is different from italic).
15401 \begin_layout Labeling
15402 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15407 \begin_inset space ~
15414 This is the Small caps font shape
15421 \begin_layout Labeling
15422 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15428 Alters the text color.
15429 Note that not all DVI-viewers are able to display colors.
15433 \begin_inset space ~
15439 which means that the document default color set in
15441 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15442 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
15448 \begin_inset space ~
15454 you can choose between
15550 \begin_inset Index idx
15555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15565 \begin_layout Labeling
15566 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15572 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from the language of the document.
15573 Text marked in this way will be underlined in blue to indicate the change (only within \SpecialChar LyX
15575 \begin_inset Newline newline
15578 If you have for example,
15579 an extract of German text in a non-German document,
15581 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
15582 When using the spell checking (see section
15585 \begin_inset space ~
15589 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15591 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
15598 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
15601 \begin_layout Labeling
15602 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15608 Alters the size of the font.
15609 You will find no numerical values here;
15610 all possible sizes are actually proportional to the document font size.
15612 you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
15614 but a general description of what you want to do.
15619 \begin_layout Labeling
15620 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15629 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15633 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15644 arg "font-size tiny"
15652 \begin_layout Labeling
15653 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15662 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15666 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15677 arg "font-size scriptsize"
15685 \begin_layout Labeling
15686 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15695 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15699 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15710 arg "font-size footnotesize"
15718 \begin_layout Labeling
15719 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15728 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15732 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15743 arg "font-size small"
15751 \begin_layout Labeling
15752 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15759 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15763 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15767 It's also the default size.
15773 arg "font-size normal"
15781 \begin_layout Labeling
15782 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15791 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15795 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15806 arg "font-size large"
15814 \begin_layout Labeling
15815 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15824 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15828 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15839 arg "font-size larger"
15847 \begin_layout Labeling
15848 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15857 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15861 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15872 arg "font-size largest"
15880 \begin_layout Labeling
15881 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15890 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15894 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15905 arg "font-size huge"
15913 \begin_layout Labeling
15914 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15923 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15927 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15938 arg "font-size giant"
15946 \begin_layout Labeling
15947 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15953 This increases the size by one step (for instance,
15955 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15959 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15963 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15967 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15976 arg "font-size increase"
15984 \begin_layout Labeling
15985 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
15991 This decreases the size by one step (for instance,
15993 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15997 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16001 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16005 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16014 arg "font-size decrease"
16023 \begin_layout Standard
16031 don't go crazy with this feature.
16032 You should almost never need to change the font size.
16034 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments —
16036 This is here for fine-tuning only!
16039 \begin_layout Labeling
16040 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16046 Here you can change a few other things at the character level.
16051 \begin_layout Labeling
16052 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16060 This is text with emphasize on
16063 This might seem like the same as
16068 but it is actually a bit different.
16074 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized text.
16075 Normally this font is equal to italic.
16078 \begin_layout Labeling
16079 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16087 This is text with Underbar on.
16095 arg "font-underline"
16103 \begin_inset Newline newline
16108 Avoid using underbar if you can!
16109 It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
16110 when you could not change fonts.
16111 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
16112 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
16113 because some people
16117 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
16120 \begin_layout Labeling
16121 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16126 \begin_inset space ~
16133 This is text with Double underbar on.
16141 arg "font-underunderline"
16147 \begin_inset Newline newline
16150 As we just warned you against using underbar,
16151 you can imagine what we think about double underbar.
16154 \begin_layout Labeling
16155 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16160 \begin_inset space ~
16167 This is text with Wavy underbar on.
16175 arg "font-underwave"
16181 \begin_inset Newline newline
16184 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
16185 Keep antinausea pills handy.
16188 \begin_layout Labeling
16189 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16194 \begin_inset space ~
16201 This is text with Strikeout on.
16209 arg "font-strikeout"
16215 \begin_inset Newline newline
16218 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been changed in the meantime.
16221 \begin_layout Labeling
16222 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16227 \begin_inset space ~
16234 This is text with Cross out on.
16237 \begin_inset Newline newline
16240 This is used to make text hardly readable.
16243 \begin_layout Labeling
16244 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
16252 This is text with Noun on.
16260 this is a logical attribute.
16261 Normally it's equivalent to
16264 \begin_inset space ~
16273 \begin_layout Standard
16276 So you have a huge number of combinations to choose from.
16277 Once you have chosen a new character style via the
16279 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
16281 \begin_inset space ~
16284 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
16292 arg "dialog-show character"
16298 the settings are saved.
16299 You can activate them by using the toolbar button
16304 arg "textstyle-apply"
16310 The button lets you apply your custom character style even when the dialog isn't visible.
16313 \begin_layout Standard
16316 To completely reset the character style to the default,
16328 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed (suppose you just set the shape to
16329 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16333 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16337 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16341 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16348 \begin_inset space ~
16360 \begin_layout Standard
16363 You should also know something about the differences between the three main font types
16371 \begin_inset space ~
16384 \begin_layout Itemize
16391 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16395 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16399 which means every character has the same width;
16401 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16405 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16409 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16413 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16418 \begin_inset Newline newline
16422 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
16425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16438 \begin_inset Note Note
16441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16444 For more on phantoms see section
16445 \begin_inset space ~
16449 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16451 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
16462 \begin_inset Newline newline
16468 \begin_layout Itemize
16474 fonts use characters with serifs.
16475 These are the small
16476 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16480 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16483 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
16484 The following example shows the difference:
16485 \begin_inset Newline newline
16489 \begin_inset Newline newline
16494 text without serifs
16497 \begin_inset Newline newline
16500 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
16501 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
16508 \begin_layout Itemize
16514 is not recommended for use as a base type.
16515 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
16516 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
16519 \begin_layout Standard
16522 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16526 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16529 refers to applying or removing font properties.
16530 When a property is marked for toggling in the
16533 \begin_inset space ~
16539 applying the style to text that already has the property will cause the property to be removed.
16542 apply a style with properties A,
16543 B and C to text that currently has font properties B,
16546 and if B is set to toggle and C is set not to toggle,
16547 the text ends up with properties A,
16551 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16555 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16559 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16563 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16566 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
16567 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
16568 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16572 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16576 toggling behavior is up to you.
16580 \begin_inset space ~
16586 all of the left side properties are toggled;
16591 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16595 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16602 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16606 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16610 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16614 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16620 \begin_inset space ~
16626 then apply the style to bold face text,
16627 the text will revert to the default series (
16628 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16632 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16636 no matter how many times you apply the style.
16639 \begin_layout Standard
16642 We conclude with the same warning once again:
16643 Do not overuse the fonts!
16645 more often than not,
16646 a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
16649 \begin_layout Section
16653 \begin_layout Subsection
16657 \begin_layout Standard
16660 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation using \SpecialChar LyX
16662 you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
16663 Before we tell you that,
16664 we want to give you a quick explanation of what goes on behind-the-scenes.
16665 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
16667 Additional Features
16672 \begin_layout Standard
16676 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
16679 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
16680 typesetting system,
16681 but to prevent confusion,
16682 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
16685 is what you use to do your actual writing.
16688 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
16689 to turn your writing into printable output.
16690 This happens in two stages:
16693 \begin_layout Enumerate
16698 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
16700 generating a file with the extension,
16702 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16710 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16716 \begin_layout Enumerate
16721 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
16722 to use the commands in the
16726 file to produce printable output.
16729 \begin_layout Subsection
16731 \begin_inset Index idx
16736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16743 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16745 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
16752 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16754 \begin_inset Index idx
16759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16769 \begin_layout Standard
16772 This file type has the extension
16773 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16781 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16785 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
16786 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16789 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
16790 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16796 \begin_layout Standard
16799 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
16801 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16802 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16804 \begin_inset space ~
16811 this will not export any externally generated material such as a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
16812 bibliography (section
16815 \begin_inset space ~
16819 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16821 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
16829 If your document includes such material,
16832 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16833 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16835 \begin_inset space ~
16839 \begin_inset space ~
16843 \begin_inset space ~
16851 \begin_inset space ~
16855 \begin_inset space ~
16861 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
16864 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16867 \begin_inset Index idx
16872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16882 \begin_layout Standard
16885 This file type has the extension
16886 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16894 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16897 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16898 program to process your document.
16899 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
16901 you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
16902 -Errors or to process it manually with console commands.
16903 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
16904 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
16905 's temporary directory whenever you view or export your document.
16908 \begin_layout Standard
16911 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
16912 -file using the menu
16914 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16915 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16919 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
16920 export variants are explained in section
16923 \begin_inset space ~
16927 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16929 reference "subsec:Export"
16937 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16939 \begin_inset Index idx
16944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16954 \begin_layout Standard
16957 This file type has the extension
16958 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16966 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16971 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16975 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16979 because it is completely portable;
16980 you can move them from one machine to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
16981 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
16985 \begin_layout Standard
16988 DVI files do not contain images,
16989 they only link to them.
16990 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
16991 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make them visible when you scroll the DVI,
16992 this can slow down your computer when you view the DVI.
16993 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
16996 \begin_layout Standard
16999 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
17001 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17002 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17007 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17008 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17010 \begin_inset space ~
17016 The latter option uses the program
17018 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17024 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17027 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font access (see section
17028 \begin_inset space ~
17032 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17034 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
17040 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17041 is still a work in progress,
17042 but it might develop into the next standard \SpecialChar TeX
17046 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17048 \begin_inset Index idx
17053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17063 \begin_layout Standard
17066 This file type has the extension
17067 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17075 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17079 PostScript was developed by the company
17083 as a printer language.
17084 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the file.
17085 PostScript can be seen as a
17086 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17089 programming language
17090 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17094 you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
17098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17101 If you are interested in learning more about this,
17102 have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
17110 \begin_inset Index idx
17115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17127 As a result of this,
17128 the files are often bigger than PDFs.
17131 \begin_layout Standard
17134 PostScript can only contain images in the format
17135 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17138 Encapsulated PostScript
17139 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17144 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17152 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17156 As \SpecialChar LyX
17157 allows you to use any known image format in your document,
17158 it has to convert them in the background to EPS.
17162 \begin_inset space ~
17165 images in your document,
17168 \begin_inset space ~
17171 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
17172 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
17174 So if you plan to use PostScript,
17175 you can insert your images directly as EPS to avoid this problem.
17178 \begin_layout Standard
17181 You can export to PostScript using the menu
17183 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17184 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17190 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17192 \begin_inset Index idx
17197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17205 \begin_inset Index idx
17210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17221 \begin_layout Standard
17224 This file type has the extension
17225 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17233 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17238 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17241 Portable Document Format
17242 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17249 was derived from PostScript.
17250 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
17252 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17256 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17260 it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output looks exactly the same.
17263 \begin_layout Standard
17266 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
17267 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17270 Joint Photographic Experts Group
17271 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17276 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17284 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17288 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17296 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17300 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17303 Portable Network Graphics
17304 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17309 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17317 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17321 You can also use any other image format,
17322 because \SpecialChar LyX
17323 converts them in the background to one of these formats.
17324 But as described in the section about PostScript,
17325 the image conversion will slow down your workflow.
17326 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
17329 \begin_layout Standard
17330 يمكنك تصدير مستندك إلى PDF بعد طرق من خلال
17332 ملف\SpecialChar menuseparator
17336 \begin_layout Description
17340 \begin_inset space ~
17343 (pdflatex) This uses the program
17347 which converts your file directly to PDF.
17350 \begin_layout Description
17354 \begin_inset space ~
17361 ) This uses the program
17363 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17366 which converts your file directly to PDF.
17369 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17378 that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font access (see section
17379 \begin_inset space ~
17383 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17385 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
17391 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
17392 is still a work in progress,
17393 but it might develop into the next standard \SpecialChar TeX
17397 \begin_layout Description
17401 \begin_inset space ~
17408 ) This uses the program
17413 that converts your file directly to PDF.
17419 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font access (see section
17420 \begin_inset space ~
17424 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17426 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
17432 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts,
17434 vertically written Japanese.
17437 \begin_layout Description
17441 \begin_inset space ~
17444 (cropped) This is the same as
17447 \begin_inset space ~
17452 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
17453 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
17454 to generate good-looking formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
17457 \begin_layout Description
17461 \begin_inset space ~
17464 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
17468 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to PDF.
17471 \begin_layout Description
17475 \begin_inset space ~
17478 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
17482 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
17483 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
17487 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
17488 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
17491 \begin_layout Standard
17497 \begin_inset space ~
17506 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions,
17509 and works without problems.
17510 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
17511 or specific OpenType fonts,
17512 you might want to try out
17515 \begin_inset space ~
17523 \begin_inset space ~
17529 bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature as
17536 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17538 \begin_inset Index idx
17543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17551 \begin_inset Index idx
17556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17567 \begin_layout Standard
17570 This file type has the extension
17571 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17579 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17583 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
17584 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
17585 When \SpecialChar LyX
17587 it also generates corresponding images in formats suitable for the purpose.
17588 For the math output you can choose in the menu
17590 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17591 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
17594 between different formats,
17595 which are described in section
17597 Math Output in XHTML
17602 \begin_inset space ~
17610 \begin_layout Standard
17613 XHTML output remains
17614 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17618 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17622 and not all \SpecialChar LyX
17623 features are supported yet.
17627 and the World Wide Web
17632 Additional Features
17635 for more information.
17638 \begin_layout Standard
17641 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
17643 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
17644 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
17650 \begin_layout Subsection
17652 \begin_inset Index idx
17657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17667 \begin_layout Standard
17670 To get a look at the final version of your document,
17671 with all of the page breaks in place,
17672 the footnotes correctly numbered,
17682 or use the toolbar button
17693 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default output format,
17694 which is globally set in the preferences (see section
17695 \begin_inset space ~
17699 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17701 reference "sec:File-Formats"
17706 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings (see section
17707 \begin_inset space ~
17711 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17713 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
17719 Further output formats can be selected via
17721 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17722 View (Other Formats)
17724 or the toolbar button
17735 \begin_layout Standard
17738 If you have changed your document,
17739 you can refresh the output in the same viewer window using the menu
17741 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17746 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17747 Update (Other Formats)
17753 \begin_layout Standard
17756 When you preview a file,
17757 the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
17758 's temporary directory.
17759 To have a real output,
17760 export your document.
17763 \begin_layout Section
17764 كلمات قليلة عن الطباعة
17765 \begin_inset Index idx
17770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17779 \begin_layout Subsection
17781 وعلامتا الشرطة والناقص
17782 \begin_inset Index idx
17787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17794 \begin_inset Index idx
17799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17808 \begin_layout Standard
17811 In \SpecialChar LyX
17814 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17822 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17825 symbol comes in four variants:
17846 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
17852 \begin_layout Standard
17855 \begin_inset Box Frameless
17865 height_special "totalheight"
17870 backgroundcolor "none"
17873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17876 \begin_inset Tabular
17877 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
17878 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
17879 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
17880 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17881 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
17882 <row interlinespace="3mm">
17883 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
17886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17894 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
17897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17905 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
17908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17917 <row interlinespace="3mm">
17918 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17929 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17940 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17943 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17946 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17954 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17963 <row interlinespace="3mm">
17964 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17975 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17986 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
17989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17992 system key combination or
17993 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17997 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18006 <row interlinespace="3mm">
18007 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18018 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18030 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18036 system key combination or
18037 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18041 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18051 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18062 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18068 \begin_inset Formula $-$
18076 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18082 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18090 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18109 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
18115 \begin_layout Standard
18118 Dashes can also be inserted with
18120 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18122 \begin_inset space ~
18125 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
18133 function with the Unicode code point as argument (2013 for the em dash and 2014 for the en dash).
18136 \begin_layout Standard
18139 Hyphen and dashes are distinct from the minus sign,
18140 which appears in math mode and has a length of its own.
18141 Here are some examples:
18144 \begin_layout Enumerate
18147 line- and page-breaks
18148 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
18158 \begin_layout Enumerate
18163 \begin_inset space ~
18167 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
18177 \begin_layout Enumerate
18180 The em dash is used without spaces:
18183 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
18193 \begin_layout Enumerate
18196 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
18200 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
18210 \begin_layout Standard
18214 \begin_inset CommandInset href
18216 name "Wikipedia entry on dashes"
18217 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dash"
18225 \begin_layout Subsection
18227 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18229 name "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
18236 \begin_layout Standard
18239 Whether line breaks before or after dashes are allowed depends on the use case and locale,
18241 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18247 \begin_layout Itemize
18251 line breaks are generally allowed after the dash,
18252 but no line break should occur if only a single character follows the dash (as in A–Z).
18255 \begin_layout Itemize
18259 dashes used to set off parenthetical statements should not start a new line.
18262 \begin_layout Itemize
18265 In French and Spanish,
18266 dashes around parenthetical statements are treated similar to brackets:
18267 line breaks are not allowed on the inner side.
18270 \begin_layout Standard
18274 dashes are output by \SpecialChar LyX
18275 to \SpecialChar LaTeX
18277 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18281 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18286 allows line breaks after hyphens,
18287 en-dashes and em-dashes.
18290 \begin_layout Enumerate
18293 Line breaks before spaced en dashes
18294 \begin_inset space ~
18297 – common in British English and generally recommended by
18299 The Elements of Typographic Style
18302 \begin_inset space ~
18305 – can be prevented using protected spaces.
18308 \begin_layout Enumerate
18311 Unwanted line breaks after dashes can be prevented by wrapping in a makebox
18315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18320 Prevent Hyphenation
18325 \begin_inset space ~
18341 in \SpecialChar TeX
18347 \begin_layout Itemize
18351 \begin_inset space ~
18355 \begin_inset Box Frameless
18365 height_special "totalheight"
18370 backgroundcolor "none"
18373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18384 \begin_layout Itemize
18388 \begin_inset Box Frameless
18398 height_special "totalheight"
18403 backgroundcolor "none"
18406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18410 \begin_inset space ~
18418 si tout le monde ne les aime pas
18419 \begin_inset space ~
18422 – sont très utiles.
18425 \begin_layout Itemize
18432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18442 un inciso con rayas—
18447 \begin_layout Standard
18450 An incorrect line break is easily overlooked because
18451 \begin_inset space ~
18454 – in contrast to an overfull line
18455 \begin_inset space ~
18458 – it does not trigger a warning in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18462 \begin_layout Standard
18465 If you want to globally disable line breaks after dashes,
18466 you can select the option
18468 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18469 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18470 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
18471 Disallow line breaks after dashes
18476 \begin_layout Enumerate
18479 Line breaks are still allowed after spaced dashes.
18480 They can be prevented using protected spaces (without need for a makebox or \SpecialChar TeX
18486 \begin_layout Itemize
18490 \begin_inset space ~
18493 même si tout le monde ne les aime pas
18494 \begin_inset space ~
18497 – sont très utiles.
18501 \begin_layout Enumerate
18504 Line breaks after unspaced dashes can be allowed via the menu
18505 \begin_inset Newline newline
18510 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18511 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18512 Optional line break
18518 \begin_layout Itemize
18521 Em-dashes without spaces—
18522 \SpecialChar allowbreak
18523 common in American English—
18524 \SpecialChar allowbreak
18525 should be followed by a line break opportunity.
18528 \begin_layout Standard
18531 This also allows hyphenation of the word following the dash (see section
18532 \begin_inset space ~
18536 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18538 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
18550 \begin_layout Enumerate
18555 hyphenates words also if immediately followed by em or en dashes (see section
18556 \begin_inset space ~
18560 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
18562 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
18573 \begin_layout Subsubsection
18576 Changes and backwards compatibility
18579 \begin_layout Standard
18582 Up to \SpecialChar LyX
18584 \begin_inset space ~
18588 consecutive hyphen characters (-- and ---) in the LyX source were merged to en or em dashes by LaTeX.
18590 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18594 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18597 retain the line-break properties of hyphens while literal dash characters are regarded by \SpecialChar LaTeX
18605 \begin_layout Standard
18608 Since \SpecialChar LyX
18610 \begin_inset space ~
18614 consecutive hyphens in the LyX source are exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
18615 in a way that prevents ligation to dashes.
18617 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18621 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18624 in documents from earlier versions are converted to literal dash characters (except in
18629 typed in consecutive hyphens are merged to dash characters immediately after the input (unless the current text font is
18637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18640 The behavior was changed since
18641 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18645 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18649 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18653 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18659 An unintended consequence of these changes was that all dashes were output as non-breakable dashes.
18660 This also resulted in changed line breaks in some older documents.
18669 \begin_layout Standard
18674 \begin_inset space ~
18682 When opening documents edited with \SpecialChar LyX
18684 \begin_inset space ~
18687 2.2 or earlier and containing literal dash characters not followed by whitespace,
18690 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18691 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18692 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
18693 Disallow line breaks after dashes
18695 is active to prevent changes to the line breaks.
18700 If you used both literal and
18701 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18705 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18708 dashes in pre-\SpecialChar LyX
18710 \begin_inset space ~
18714 you may need to enable or prevent individual line breaks as shown above to restore the correct line breaking behavior.
18717 \begin_layout Subsection
18719 \begin_inset Index idx
18724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18731 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18733 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
18740 \begin_layout Standard
18743 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
18744 but automatically in the output.
18745 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18753 \begin_inset Index idx
18758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18767 following the rules of the document language.
18769 does not hyphenate text in the
18773 font and words immediately preceded or followed by hyphens or dashes.
18776 \begin_layout Standard
18780 hyphenates almost perfectly;
18781 it only has problems with text in the
18785 font and with unusual constructs,
18787 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18791 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18795 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
18796 cannot break a word correctly,
18797 you can set hyphenation points manually.
18798 This is done with the menu
18800 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18801 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18803 \begin_inset space ~
18809 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
18811 If no hyphenation is necessary,
18816 \begin_layout Standard
18819 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
18820 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document in the form
18821 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18825 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18830 would then see the hyphen
18831 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18835 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18838 as a line break possibility.
18839 A line break at this point would look ugly.
18840 To prevent the shortcut from being broken,
18841 you can use a protected hyphen (
18843 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18844 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18847 ) or put it into a makebox
18850 \begin_layout Standard
18853 as described in section
18855 Prevent Hyphenation
18860 \begin_inset space ~
18868 \begin_layout Subsection
18870 \begin_inset Index idx
18875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18884 \begin_layout Subsubsection
18885 الاختصارات ونهايات الجمل
18886 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18888 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
18895 \begin_layout Standard
18898 When \SpecialChar LyX
18899 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
18900 to generate the final version of your document,
18902 automatically distinguishes between words,
18907 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18910 appropriate amount of space.
18911 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18914 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and the next word.
18915 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word gets after another word.
18918 \begin_layout Standard
18922 the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does not work in all cases.
18924 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18932 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18935 is at the end of a lowercase letter,
18936 it's the end of a sentence;
18937 if it's at the end of a capitalized letter,
18938 it's an abbreviation.
18941 \begin_layout Standard
18944 Here are some examples of
18948 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
18951 \begin_layout Itemize
18958 \begin_layout Itemize
18965 \begin_layout Standard
18968 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
18971 \begin_layout Itemize
18975 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18979 this is too much space!
18982 \begin_layout Itemize
18989 \begin_layout Standard
18992 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
18995 \begin_layout Standard
18998 To fix this problem,
18999 use one of the following:
19002 \begin_layout Enumerate
19008 \begin_inset space ~
19013 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
19014 \begin_inset space ~
19018 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19020 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
19028 \begin_inset Index idx
19033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19043 \begin_layout Enumerate
19049 \begin_inset space ~
19054 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
19055 \begin_inset space ~
19059 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19061 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
19069 \begin_inset Index idx
19074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19084 \begin_layout Enumerate
19090 \begin_inset space ~
19094 \begin_inset space ~
19098 \begin_inset space ~
19105 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19107 \begin_inset space ~
19112 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
19113 This function is also bound to
19118 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
19126 \begin_layout Standard
19129 With the corrections,
19130 our earlier examples look like this:
19133 \begin_layout Itemize
19137 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19141 \begin_inset space \space{}
19144 this is too much space!
19147 \begin_layout Itemize
19150 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
19154 \begin_layout Standard
19157 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
19158 If your language is such a language,
19159 you don't need to worry,
19160 because \SpecialChar LaTeX
19161 will take care of this.
19164 \begin_layout Standard
19167 For those that do need to bother,
19168 there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
19172 \begin_inset space ~
19178 feature described in the section
19180 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
19185 Additional Features
19190 \begin_layout Subsubsection
19192 \begin_inset Index idx
19197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19205 \begin_inset Index idx
19210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19211 علامات الاقتباس | أنظر
19215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19241 \begin_layout Standard
19245 usually sets quotation marks correctly.
19247 it will insert an opening mark at the beginning of quoted text,
19248 and use a closing mark at the end.
19251 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19255 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19259 The keyboard character,
19265 generates this automatically.
19268 \begin_layout Standard
19271 You can specify what character the
19275 key produces by using the submenu
19281 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
19286 \begin_inset Index idx
19291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19300 dialog and switching the
19304 (note that \SpecialChar LyX
19305 makes a sensible proposal for the selected main language).
19307 \begin_inset space ~
19313 \begin_layout Labeling
19314 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19319 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19323 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19327 \begin_inset space ~
19331 \begin_inset space ~
19335 \begin_inset Quotes els
19339 \begin_inset Quotes ers
19345 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19349 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19353 \begin_inset Quotes els
19357 \begin_inset Quotes ers
19360 quotation marks (as common,
19362 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19369 \begin_layout Labeling
19370 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19374 \begin_inset Quotes sld
19378 \begin_inset Quotes sld
19382 \begin_inset space ~
19386 \begin_inset space ~
19390 \begin_inset Quotes sls
19394 \begin_inset Quotes srs
19400 \begin_inset Quotes sld
19404 \begin_inset Quotes sld
19408 \begin_inset Quotes sls
19412 \begin_inset Quotes srs
19415 quotation marks (as common,
19417 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19424 \begin_layout Labeling
19425 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19429 \begin_inset Quotes gld
19433 \begin_inset Quotes grd
19437 \begin_inset space ~
19441 \begin_inset space ~
19445 \begin_inset Quotes gls
19449 \begin_inset Quotes grs
19455 \begin_inset Quotes gld
19459 \begin_inset Quotes grd
19463 \begin_inset Quotes gls
19467 \begin_inset Quotes grs
19470 quotation marks (as common,
19472 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19479 \begin_layout Labeling
19480 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19484 \begin_inset Quotes pld
19488 \begin_inset Quotes prd
19492 \begin_inset space ~
19496 \begin_inset space ~
19500 \begin_inset Quotes pls
19504 \begin_inset Quotes prs
19510 \begin_inset Quotes pld
19514 \begin_inset Quotes prd
19518 \begin_inset Quotes pls
19522 \begin_inset Quotes prs
19525 quotation marks (as common,
19527 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19534 \begin_layout Labeling
19535 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19539 \begin_inset Quotes cld
19543 \begin_inset Quotes crd
19547 \begin_inset space ~
19551 \begin_inset space ~
19555 \begin_inset Quotes cls
19559 \begin_inset Quotes crs
19565 \begin_inset Quotes cld
19569 \begin_inset Quotes crd
19573 \begin_inset Quotes cls
19577 \begin_inset Quotes crs
19580 quotation marks (as common,
19582 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19589 \begin_layout Labeling
19590 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19594 \begin_inset Quotes ald
19598 \begin_inset Quotes ard
19602 \begin_inset space ~
19606 \begin_inset space ~
19610 \begin_inset Quotes als
19614 \begin_inset Quotes ars
19620 \begin_inset Quotes ald
19624 \begin_inset Quotes ard
19628 \begin_inset Quotes als
19632 \begin_inset Quotes ars
19635 quotation marks (as common,
19637 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19644 \begin_layout Labeling
19645 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19649 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19653 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19657 \begin_inset space ~
19661 \begin_inset space ~
19665 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19669 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19675 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19679 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
19683 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19687 \begin_inset Quotes qls
19690 quotation marks (so-called plain or non-typographical quotation marks)
19693 \begin_layout Labeling
19694 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19698 \begin_inset Quotes bld
19702 \begin_inset Quotes brd
19706 \begin_inset space ~
19710 \begin_inset space ~
19714 \begin_inset Quotes bls
19718 \begin_inset Quotes brs
19724 \begin_inset Quotes bld
19728 \begin_inset Quotes brd
19732 \begin_inset Quotes bls
19736 \begin_inset Quotes brs
19739 quotation marks (as common,
19741 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19748 \begin_layout Labeling
19749 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19753 \begin_inset Quotes fld
19757 \begin_inset Quotes frd
19761 \begin_inset space ~
19765 \begin_inset space ~
19769 \begin_inset Quotes fls
19773 \begin_inset Quotes frs
19779 \begin_inset Quotes fld
19783 \begin_inset Quotes frd
19787 \begin_inset Quotes fls
19791 \begin_inset Quotes frs
19794 quotation marks (as common,
19796 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19803 \begin_layout Labeling
19804 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19808 \begin_inset Quotes ild
19812 \begin_inset Quotes ird
19816 \begin_inset space ~
19820 \begin_inset space ~
19824 \begin_inset Quotes ils
19828 \begin_inset Quotes irs
19834 \begin_inset Quotes ild
19838 \begin_inset Quotes ird
19842 \begin_inset Quotes ils
19846 \begin_inset Quotes irs
19849 quotation marks (another style common in France)
19853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19856 Maybe you wonder why one does not simply use only outer marks in this case,
19857 since these look identical to the inner marks.
19858 The answer is that you cannot easily switch to another style then (where the inner marks differ).
19866 \begin_layout Labeling
19867 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19871 \begin_inset Quotes rld
19875 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
19879 \begin_inset space ~
19883 \begin_inset space ~
19887 \begin_inset Quotes rls
19891 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
19897 \begin_inset Quotes rld
19901 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
19905 \begin_inset Quotes rls
19909 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
19912 quotation marks (as common,
19914 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
19921 \begin_layout Labeling
19922 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
19926 \begin_inset Quotes wld
19930 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
19934 \begin_inset space ~
19938 \begin_inset space ~
19942 \begin_inset Quotes wls
19946 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
19952 \begin_inset Quotes wld
19956 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
19960 \begin_inset Quotes wls
19964 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
19967 quotation marks (another style common in Sweden)
19970 \begin_layout Standard
19973 Inner quotation marks
19977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19980 In many writing cultures,
19981 these are single quotation marks.
19982 But as the British and French styles show,
19983 this is not necessarily the case (and specifically the British style shows that
19984 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19988 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19991 does not necessarily mean
19992 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19996 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20000 This is why we call them
20001 \begin_inset Quotes els
20005 \begin_inset Quotes ers
20009 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20013 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20021 for quotations inside quotations (and other tasks in some languages,
20023 \begin_inset Quotes els
20027 \begin_inset Quotes ers
20030 ) can be obtained by means of the shortcut
20035 arg "quote-insert inner"
20042 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20048 \begin_layout Standard
20052 the quotation mark styles are persistent.
20054 a quotation mark maintains the style that was current when it was inserted,
20055 even if the document-wide style changes.
20056 This allows you to enter marks of different style.
20057 If you check the setting
20059 Use dynamic quotation marks
20063 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
20064 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
20069 special quotation marks will be inserted (in the LyX window,
20070 they appear in a special color).
20071 These marks will automatically adapt to the main style (and its changes).
20072 Such quotation marks make it easy to alter the quotation mark style in one step (e.
20073 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20077 if your publisher requests a different style).
20080 \begin_layout Standard
20083 Individual quotation marks (i.
20084 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20088 their level [inner,
20092 and style) can be easily switched by a context menu that pops up if you right-click on a mark.
20095 \begin_layout Subsection
20097 \begin_inset Index idx
20102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20110 \begin_inset Index idx
20115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20120 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20144 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20146 name "subsec:Ligatures"
20153 \begin_layout Standard
20156 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and print them as single characters.
20157 These groups are known as
20162 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
20163 knows about ligatures,
20164 your documents will contain them too in the output.
20165 Here are the standard ligatures:
20168 \begin_layout Itemize
20174 \begin_layout Itemize
20180 \begin_layout Itemize
20186 \begin_layout Itemize
20192 \begin_layout Itemize
20198 \begin_layout Standard
20201 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
20204 \begin_layout Standard
20208 you don't want a ligature in a word.
20209 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
20211 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20215 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20218 it looks really weird in compound words,
20220 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20224 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20228 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20232 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20235 To break a ligature,
20238 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20239 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
20241 \begin_inset space ~
20248 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20252 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20256 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20259 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
20261 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20265 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20269 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20273 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20276 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
20278 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20284 \begin_layout Subsection
20285 رمزي \SpecialChar LyX
20286 و \SpecialChar LaTeX
20288 \begin_inset Index idx
20293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20303 \begin_layout Standard
20308 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20309 Special Characters\SpecialChar menuseparator
20314 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
20317 \begin_layout Description
20322 \begin_layout Description
20324 محرك المحارف المستخدم في هذا البرنامج \SpecialChar LyX
20328 \begin_layout Description
20332 The \SpecialChar TeX
20333 macro collection used by \SpecialChar LyX
20337 \begin_layout Description
20338 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
20339 الإصدار الحالي من \SpecialChar LaTeX
20343 \begin_layout Standard
20346 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
20348 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20352 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
20356 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20360 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
20361 world to give programs geek version numbers.
20362 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
20363 converges to the number
20364 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
20368 The actual version is
20369 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20374 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20378 the previous one was
20379 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20384 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20390 \begin_layout Subsection
20392 \begin_inset Index idx
20397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20407 \begin_layout Standard
20410 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal space between two words.
20411 As you can see in the example below,
20412 it looks better when the space is smaller.
20414 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20418 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20421 for units use the menu
20423 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20424 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
20426 \begin_inset space ~
20436 arg "space-insert thin"
20444 \begin_layout Standard
20445 هذا مثال لتشاهد الفرق:
20448 \begin_layout Standard
20449 \begin_inset Tabular
20450 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
20451 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
20452 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
20453 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
20455 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20460 \begin_inset space ~
20464 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
20472 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20476 المسافة بين الرقم والوحدة
20483 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20488 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
20492 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
20500 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
20503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20504 نصف المسافة بين الرقم والوحدة
20517 \begin_layout Subsection
20519 \begin_inset Index idx
20524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20534 \begin_layout Standard
20537 In the early days of word processors,
20538 page breaks went wherever the page happened to end.
20539 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
20540 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom of the page,
20541 the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom of a page,
20542 or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
20543 These bits of text became known as
20554 \begin_layout Standard
20559 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
20560 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
20561 But what about widows and orphans,
20562 where the page breaks leave one line of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page?
20563 There are rules built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
20564 governing page breaks,
20565 and some of those rules are there specifically to prevent widows and orphans.
20566 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them,
20567 you can add the commands
20568 \begin_inset Newline newline
20576 \begin_inset Newline newline
20584 \begin_inset Newline newline
20587 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
20588 preamble of your document to avoid them.
20589 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
20591 \begin_inset space ~
20595 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
20597 key "latexcompanion"
20603 \begin_inset space ~
20607 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
20614 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
20615 's page break mechanism.
20618 \begin_layout Chapter
20622 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20624 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
20631 \begin_layout Standard
20634 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
20637 \begin_inset space ~
20643 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
20646 \begin_layout Section
20648 \begin_inset Index idx
20653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20660 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20669 \begin_layout Standard
20673 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
20676 \begin_layout Description
20681 \begin_inset space ~
20684 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
20685 \begin_inset Newline newline
20689 \begin_inset Note Note
20692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20695 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
20703 \begin_layout Description
20706 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
20707 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
20710 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
20711 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
20713 \begin_inset space ~
20719 \begin_inset Newline newline
20723 \begin_inset Note Comment
20726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20729 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
20738 \begin_layout Description
20742 \begin_inset space ~
20745 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can set in the document settings under
20747 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
20749 \begin_inset space ~
20755 \begin_inset Newline newline
20759 \begin_inset Newline newline
20763 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
20766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20776 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
20777 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
20782 of a comment that appears in the output.
20788 \begin_inset Newline newline
20792 \begin_inset Newline newline
20795 As you can see in the example,
20796 greyed out notes can have footnotes.
20799 \begin_layout Standard
20802 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
20814 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20818 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
20821 \begin_layout Section
20823 \begin_inset Index idx
20828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20835 \begin_inset CommandInset label
20837 name "sec:Footnotes"
20844 \begin_layout Standard
20848 uses boxes to display footnotes:
20849 When you insert a footnote using the menu
20851 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20854 or the toolbar button
20859 arg "footnote-insert"
20875 \begin_inset Graphics
20876 filename ../clipart/footnote.png
20885 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
20886 's representation of your footnote.
20896 \begin_inset Quotes eld
20904 \begin_inset Quotes erd
20920 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
20921 Clicking on the box label again will close
20934 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote,
20935 simply highlight it and click on the footnote
20950 \begin_layout Standard
20953 Here is an example footnote:
20961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20964 To close a footnote,
20965 click on the footnote box label.
20973 \begin_layout Standard
20976 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text position where the footnote box is placed.
20977 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
20978 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
20979 according to the document class.
20981 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme,
20982 but you can get other schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
20988 ey are described in the
20991 \begin_inset space ~
20999 \begin_layout Section
21001 \begin_inset Index idx
21006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21013 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21015 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
21022 \begin_layout Standard
21025 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
21027 When you insert a margin note via the menu
21029 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21031 \begin_inset space ~
21036 or the toolbar button
21041 arg "marginalnote-insert"
21063 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21067 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21070 appearing within your text.
21071 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
21072 's representation of your margin
21081 \begin_layout Standard
21084 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
21088 \begin_inset Marginal
21091 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21101 \begin_layout Standard
21104 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
21105 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even pages,
21106 right on odd pages.
21109 \begin_layout Standard
21112 For further information about marginal notes see the section
21115 \begin_inset space ~
21123 \begin_inset space ~
21131 \begin_layout Section
21132 الصور والرسوم التوضيحية
21133 \begin_inset Index idx
21138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21145 \begin_inset Index idx
21150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21157 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21159 name "sec:Graphics"
21166 \begin_layout Standard
21169 To insert an image in your document,
21170 place the cursor at the text position you want and click on the toolbar icon
21175 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
21182 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21186 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
21189 \begin_layout Standard
21192 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
21197 tab allows you to choose your image file.
21198 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling factor.
21199 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
21202 \begin_inset space ~
21206 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21208 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
21216 \begin_layout Standard
21223 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width of the image in the output.
21224 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
21227 \begin_inset space ~
21231 \begin_inset space ~
21240 \begin_inset space ~
21244 \begin_inset space ~
21248 \begin_inset space ~
21253 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
21254 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore the tab
21261 \begin_layout Standard
21267 \begin_inset space ~
21271 \begin_inset space ~
21276 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
21277 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
21279 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
21284 \begin_inset space ~
21289 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output,
21290 only a frame with the image size is printed.
21293 \begin_layout Standard
21296 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
21297 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are in the text.
21298 This is an example image within a separate,
21299 horizontally centered paragraph:
21302 \begin_layout Standard
21304 \begin_inset Graphics
21305 filename ../clipart/2D-intensity-plot.pdf
21313 \begin_layout Standard
21316 If you need image captions or want to reference images,
21317 you have to put the image into a float,
21321 \begin_inset space ~
21325 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21327 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
21335 \begin_layout Subsection
21337 \begin_inset Index idx
21342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21350 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21352 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
21359 \begin_layout Standard
21362 You can insert images in any known file format.
21363 But as we explained in section
21364 \begin_inset space ~
21368 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21370 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
21376 every output document format allows only a few image formats.
21378 therefore uses the program
21382 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
21383 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
21384 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
21385 \begin_inset space ~
21389 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
21391 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
21399 \begin_layout Standard
21402 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
21405 \begin_layout Description
21409 \begin_inset space ~
21412 images consist of pixel values,
21413 often in a compressed form.
21414 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
21415 Well-known bitmap image formats are
21416 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21419 Graphics Interchange Format
21420 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21425 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21433 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21439 \begin_inset Index idx
21444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21478 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21481 Portable Network Graphics
21482 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21487 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21495 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21501 \begin_inset Index idx
21506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21540 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21543 Joint Photographic Experts Group
21544 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21549 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21557 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21561 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21569 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21575 \begin_inset Index idx
21580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21613 \begin_layout Description
21617 \begin_inset space ~
21620 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without data loss.
21621 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations,
21622 because presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
21623 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
21624 \begin_inset Newline newline
21627 Scalable image formats can be
21628 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21631 Scalable Vector Graphics
21632 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21637 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21645 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21651 \begin_inset Index idx
21656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21690 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21693 Encapsulated PostScript
21694 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21699 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21707 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21713 \begin_inset Index idx
21718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21752 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21755 Portable Document Format
21756 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21761 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21769 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21775 \begin_inset Index idx
21780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21792 \begin_inset Quotes eld
21796 \begin_inset Quotes erd
21800 because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the result will not be scalable.
21801 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original image.
21805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21808 In the case of PDF,
21809 the original image is additionally compressed.
21817 \begin_layout Standard
21820 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one,
21828 \begin_layout Subsection
21829 إعدادات مجموعة الصور
21830 \begin_inset Index idx
21835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21845 \begin_layout Standard
21848 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing group.
21849 Images within such a group share their settings,
21850 so adjusting one image of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in the same way.
21851 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the need to manually change each of them.
21855 \begin_layout Standard
21858 A new group can be set by pressing the button
21861 \begin_inset space ~
21865 \begin_inset space ~
21877 \begin_inset space ~
21881 \begin_inset space ~
21887 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image and checking the name of the desired group.
21890 \begin_layout Section
21892 \begin_inset Index idx
21897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21904 \begin_inset CommandInset label
21913 \begin_layout Standard
21916 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
21921 arg "tabular-insert"
21928 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
21932 A dialog will appear,
21933 asking you for the number of rows and columns.
21934 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated from the rest of the table.
21935 This separation appears due to a double line:
21936 The cells of the first row have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above them.
21937 Here is an example table:
21940 \begin_layout Standard
21942 \begin_inset Tabular
21943 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
21944 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
21945 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21946 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21947 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
21948 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
21950 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21959 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21968 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21977 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21988 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21997 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22006 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22015 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22026 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22035 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22044 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22053 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22064 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22073 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22082 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22091 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22108 \begin_layout Subsection
22112 \begin_layout Standard
22115 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and then choosing
22117 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
22121 This brings up the table dialog.
22122 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell,
22123 row and/or column where the cursor is placed currently.
22124 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
22125 This means that if you select more cells,
22126 columns or rows the action is done on all of your selection.
22129 \begin_layout Standard
22132 In addition to the table dialog,
22136 \begin_inset space ~
22141 helps you in setting table properties.
22142 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
22145 \begin_layout Standard
22151 \begin_inset space ~
22156 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
22157 If you add a row or column,
22158 it will be inserted right beside or below the current cell respectively.
22159 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width is given.
22160 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs of text,
22164 \begin_inset space ~
22168 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
22170 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
22178 \begin_layout Standard
22181 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell using the check box
22190 This will merge the cells to
22195 spread over more than one column/row.
22196 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows,
22197 so that the alignment,
22199 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
22200 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one in the last row without the upper border:
22203 \begin_layout Standard
22205 \begin_inset Tabular
22206 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
22207 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
22208 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22209 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
22210 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
22211 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22213 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22222 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22231 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22234 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22240 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22251 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22260 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22269 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22278 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22289 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22298 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22307 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22316 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22333 \begin_layout Standard
22336 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
22337 -arguments for the table.
22338 They are necessary for special table formatting,
22339 such as the multirow cells,
22340 explained in the chapter
22347 \begin_inset space ~
22353 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
22354 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
22355 but are visible in the output.
22358 \begin_layout Standard
22361 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
22364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22371 Most DVI-viewers are
22375 able to display rotations.
22383 \begin_layout Standard
22390 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
22395 adds lines for all cell borders.
22398 \begin_layout Subsection
22399 الجداول متعددة-الصفحات
22400 \begin_inset Index idx
22405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22413 \begin_inset Index idx
22418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22419 جداول متعددة الصفحات
22427 \begin_layout Standard
22430 If the table is too long to fit on one page,
22431 you can use the option
22434 \begin_inset space ~
22438 \begin_inset space ~
22446 \begin_inset space ~
22451 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
22452 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
22455 \begin_layout Description
22462 The current row and all rows above,
22463 that don't have any special options defined,
22464 are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
22465 Except for the first page,
22469 \begin_inset space ~
22477 \begin_layout Description
22482 \begin_inset space ~
22488 The current row and all rows above,
22489 that don't have any special options defined,
22490 are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
22493 \begin_layout Description
22500 The current row and all rows below,
22501 that don't have any special options defined,
22502 are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
22503 except for the last page,
22507 \begin_inset space ~
22515 \begin_layout Description
22520 \begin_inset space ~
22526 The current row and all rows below,
22527 that don't have any special options defined,
22528 are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
22531 \begin_layout Description
22535 The first row is reset as a single column.
22536 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
22538 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
22542 More about multi-page table captions can be found in the
22545 \begin_inset space ~
22553 \begin_layout Standard
22556 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
22557 If you set more than one option in the same table row,
22558 you should be aware that then only the first option is used;
22559 the others will be defined as
22565 first means first in this order:
22570 \begin_inset space ~
22584 \begin_inset space ~
22590 see the following longtable to see how it works:
22593 \begin_layout Standard
22595 \begin_inset Tabular
22596 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
22597 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
22598 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
22599 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22600 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22601 <row endfirsthead="true">
22602 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22608 مثال قائمة الهاتف (تجاهل الأسماء)
22613 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22622 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22632 <row endfirsthead="true">
22633 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22644 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22653 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22665 <row endhead="true">
22666 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22677 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22686 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22696 <row endhead="true">
22697 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22708 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22717 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22729 <row endfoot="true">
22730 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22741 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22750 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22761 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22772 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22781 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22792 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22803 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22812 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22823 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22834 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22843 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22854 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22865 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22874 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22885 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22896 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22905 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22916 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22927 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22936 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22947 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22958 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22967 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22978 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22989 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22998 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23009 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23020 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23029 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23040 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23051 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23060 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23071 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23074 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23082 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23091 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23102 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23113 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23122 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23133 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23144 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23153 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23164 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23175 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23184 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23195 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23206 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23215 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23226 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23237 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23246 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23257 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23268 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23277 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23288 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23291 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23299 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23308 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23319 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23330 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23339 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23350 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23361 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23370 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23381 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23392 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23401 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23412 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23423 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23432 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23444 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23455 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23464 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23475 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23486 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23495 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23506 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23509 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23517 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23526 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23537 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23548 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23557 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23568 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23579 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23588 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23599 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23610 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23619 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23630 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23641 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23650 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23661 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23672 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23681 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23692 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23703 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23712 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23723 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23726 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23732 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
23735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23741 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23752 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23763 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23772 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23783 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23794 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23803 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23814 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23825 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23834 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23837 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23845 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23856 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23865 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23876 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23887 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23896 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23907 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23918 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23927 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23938 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23949 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23958 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23969 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23980 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
23983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23989 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24000 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24011 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24020 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24031 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24042 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24051 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24062 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24073 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24082 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24093 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24104 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24113 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24124 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24135 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24144 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24155 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24166 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24175 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24186 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24197 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24206 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24217 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24228 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24237 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24248 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24259 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24268 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24279 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24290 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24299 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24310 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24321 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24330 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24341 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24352 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24361 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24372 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24383 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24392 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24403 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24414 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24423 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24435 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24446 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24455 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24466 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24477 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24486 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24497 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24508 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24517 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24528 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24539 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24548 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24559 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24570 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24579 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24590 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24601 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24610 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24621 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24632 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24641 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24652 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24663 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24672 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24683 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24694 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
24697 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24703 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24713 <row endlastfoot="true">
24714 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24725 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
24728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24734 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24751 \begin_layout Subsection
24753 \begin_inset Index idx
24758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24766 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24768 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
24775 \begin_layout Standard
24778 A table cell can contain text,
24782 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
24783 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
24784 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
24790 nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
24793 \begin_layout Standard
24796 To have multi-line entries in table cells,
24797 you have to declare a fixed width for the column in the table dialog.
24798 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
24802 \begin_layout Standard
24806 \begin_inset Tabular
24807 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
24808 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
24809 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24810 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
24811 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24813 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24832 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24851 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24872 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24891 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24905 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
24910 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24913 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24931 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24934 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24950 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24964 This is longer now.
24969 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24990 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25009 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25012 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25023 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
25024 This is longer now.
25029 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25056 \begin_layout Standard
25059 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
25060 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
25064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25067 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
25073 Selection with the mouse or with
25077 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
25078 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting the selection from outside the table.
25081 \begin_layout Section
25083 \begin_inset Index idx
25088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25095 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25104 \begin_layout Subsection
25108 \begin_layout Standard
25111 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label,
25112 which doesn't have a fixed location.
25114 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25118 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25121 forward or backward a page or two,
25122 to wherever it fits best.
25130 \begin_inset space ~
25136 because they can float to the next page when there are too many notes on the current page.
25139 \begin_layout Standard
25142 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
25143 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace and pages without text.
25144 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and the image/table,
25145 every float can be referenced in the text.
25146 Floats are therefore numbered.
25147 Referencing is described in section
25148 \begin_inset space ~
25152 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25154 reference "sec:Cross-References"
25162 \begin_layout Standard
25168 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25172 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
25173 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in the output.
25174 After the label you can insert the caption text
25177 \begin_inset Index idx
25182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25191 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate paragraph within the float.
25192 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
25193 -document readable,
25194 you can open and close the float box by left-clicking on the box label.
25195 A closed float box looks like this:
25199 \begin_inset Graphics
25200 filename ../clipart/float.png
25207 – a gray button with a red label.
25210 \begin_layout Standard
25213 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
25214 -errors that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
25217 \begin_layout Subsection
25218 تعويم الرسم التوضيحي
25219 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25221 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
25226 \begin_inset Index idx
25231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25241 \begin_layout Standard
25245 \begin_inset space ~
25249 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25251 reference "fig:A-star-in"
25256 was created using the menu
25258 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25259 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
25267 arg "float-insert figure"
25273 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and using the menu
25275 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25283 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
25289 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor to the left or right of the image and using the menu
25291 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25293 \begin_inset space ~
25303 arg "layout-paragraph"
25311 \begin_layout Standard
25312 \begin_inset Float figure
25319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25321 \begin_inset Graphics
25322 filename ../clipart/Star-structure.pdf
25331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25332 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25335 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25337 name "fig:A-star-in"
25354 \begin_layout Standard
25357 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference to it:
25358 Insert a label into the caption using the menu
25360 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25373 ) and refer to it using the menu
25375 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25383 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
25389 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using vague references like
25390 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25394 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25399 as \SpecialChar LaTeX
25400 will reposition the floats in the final document,
25402 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25406 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25410 For more about cross-references,
25412 \begin_inset space ~
25416 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25418 reference "sec:Cross-References"
25426 \begin_layout Standard
25429 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float,
25430 but sometimes you might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
25431 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
25432 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures as described in section
25433 \begin_inset space ~
25437 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25439 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
25446 \begin_inset space ~
25450 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25452 reference "fig:Two-images"
25457 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
25458 You can also set the images one below the other.
25460 \begin_inset space ~
25464 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25466 reference "fig:Undefinable"
25472 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25474 reference "fig:Star"
25479 are the subfigures.
25482 \begin_layout Standard
25483 \begin_inset Float figure
25490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25491 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
25495 \begin_inset Float figure
25502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25503 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25506 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25508 name "fig:Undefinable"
25520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25521 \begin_inset Graphics
25522 filename ../clipart/3D-structure-distort.pdf
25534 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
25538 \begin_inset Float figure
25545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25546 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25549 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25564 \begin_inset Graphics
25565 filename ../clipart/Star-structure.pdf
25577 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
25583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25584 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25587 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25589 name "fig:Two-images"
25606 \begin_layout Subsection
25608 \begin_inset Index idx
25613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25623 \begin_layout Standard
25624 تعويم الجدول يمكن إدراجه باستخدام قائمة
25626 إدراج\SpecialChar menuseparator
25627 تعويم\SpecialChar menuseparator
25633 arg "float-insert table"
25637 وله نفس إعدادات تعويم الرسم التوضيحي باستثناء أن التعليق يكون فوق الجدول ولي تحته مثل تعليق الرسم التوضيحي ويبدأ التعليق بكلمة جدول
25638 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25640 reference "tab:Table-float"
25648 \begin_layout Standard
25649 \begin_inset Float table
25656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25657 \begin_inset Caption Standard
25659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25660 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25662 name "tab:Table-float"
25674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25676 \begin_inset Tabular
25677 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
25678 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
25679 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25680 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25681 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25683 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25692 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25701 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25712 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25721 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25730 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25741 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25745 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
25753 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25757 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
25760 \end{array}\right]$
25768 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25772 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
25793 \begin_layout Subsection
25795 \begin_inset Index idx
25800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25810 \begin_layout Standard
25814 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
25815 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme,
25816 to control the float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float caption.
25817 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
25824 \begin_inset space ~
25832 \begin_layout Section
25834 \begin_inset Index idx
25839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25848 \begin_layout Standard
25852 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page,
25855 all the usual rules of indentation,
25858 \begin_inset space \space{}
25865 \begin_layout Standard
25868 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
25869 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
25871 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25875 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage and its alignment within the page.
25878 \begin_layout Standard
25880 \begin_inset Box Frameless
25890 height_special "totalheight"
25895 backgroundcolor "none"
25898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25901 This is a minipage.
25902 The text is set in an italic style.
25905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25908 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs another formatting.
25916 \begin_layout Standard
25917 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
25923 \begin_layout Standard
25924 إذا وضعت صندوقين نصيين بجوار بعضهما،
25933 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25935 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
25968 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
25974 \begin_layout Standard
25977 \begin_inset Box Frameless
25987 height_special "totalheight"
25992 backgroundcolor "none"
25995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25998 عالمية العلم،عالمية العلم،عالمية العلم،عالمية العلم.
26004 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
26008 \begin_inset Box Frameless
26018 height_special "totalheight"
26023 backgroundcolor "none"
26026 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26029 عالمية العلم،عالمية العلم،عالمية العلم،عالمية العلم.
26037 \begin_layout Standard
26038 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
26044 \begin_layout Standard
26047 When you right-click on a minipage box,
26048 you can transform the box to another box type.
26049 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
26056 \begin_inset space ~
26064 \begin_layout Chapter
26066 \begin_inset Index idx
26071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26078 \begin_inset Index idx
26083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26112 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26114 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
26121 \begin_layout Standard
26124 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
26129 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
26132 \begin_layout Section
26133 محرر الرياضيات الأساسي
26134 \begin_inset Index idx
26139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26149 \begin_layout Standard
26152 To create a math formula,
26153 you can just click on the toolbar icon
26174 That will create a little blue rectangle,
26175 with purple markers around its corners.
26176 That blue rectangle is the formula itself;
26177 the purple markers indicate what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
26178 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
26180 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26186 \begin_layout Standard
26189 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done with the
26192 \begin_inset space ~
26198 that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
26201 \begin_layout Standard
26204 There are two main types of formulas,
26205 inline formulas and display formulas.
26206 Inline formulas appear within a text line,
26210 \begin_layout Standard
26213 This is a line with an inline formula
26214 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
26220 \begin_layout Standard
26223 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate paragraph,
26227 \begin_inset Formula
26236 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
26239 \begin_layout Standard
26243 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
26247 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26257 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26261 followed by a space,
26262 in a formula will create the Greek letter
26263 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
26267 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
26270 \begin_inset space ~
26278 \begin_layout Subsection
26280 \begin_inset Index idx
26285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26295 \begin_layout Standard
26298 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is achieved with the arrow keys.
26300 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
26301 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
26306 will leave a formula construct (a square root
26307 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
26312 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
26317 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
26320 \end{array}\right]$
26328 will leave the formula,
26329 placing the cursor after the formula.
26334 can be used to move horizontally in a formula;
26336 through the cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
26339 \begin_layout Standard
26346 printed in this document as
26347 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26351 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26355 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26359 seems to do nothing in a formula,
26360 since it does not add a space between characters,
26361 but it does exit a nested structure.
26363 you have to be careful about using
26370 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
26379 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26389 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26393 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26399 since in the latter case only the
26402 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
26407 will be under the square root sign:
26409 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
26415 \begin_layout Standard
26418 You can leave many parts of a formula,
26420 partially filled in,
26424 \begin_inset Formula
26426 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
26437 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in,
26438 or a subscript with nothing in it,
26439 the results will be unpredictable,
26440 but most constructs don't mind.
26443 \begin_layout Subsection
26447 \begin_layout Standard
26450 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
26451 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want,
26456 and a cursor movement key to select text.
26457 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
26459 you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
26460 That text can then be cut or copied,
26461 and then pasted within any formula,
26462 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
26466 \begin_layout Subsection
26467 النص العلوي والسفلي
26468 \begin_inset Index idx
26473 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26481 \begin_inset Index idx
26486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26496 \begin_layout Standard
26499 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
26504 arg "math-superscript"
26514 arg "math-subscript"
26520 but it is often much easier to use a command.
26522 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
26529 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26539 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
26546 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
26551 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
26558 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26564 If you use characters in the superscript,
26565 that could be accented with the circumflex
26566 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26570 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26574 you have to use an extra
26578 to separate the circumflex and the character.
26581 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
26588 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26594 Subscripts are similar:
26596 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
26603 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
26611 \begin_layout Subsection
26613 \begin_inset Index idx
26618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26628 \begin_layout Standard
26631 Create a fraction either with the command
26637 or by using the icon
26642 arg "math-insert \\frac"
26650 \begin_inset space ~
26656 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
26657 The cursor is above the fraction line.
26658 To move it to the bottom,
26670 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction,
26671 as this example shows:
26674 \begin_inset Formula
26676 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
26679 \end{array}\right)}\right]
26687 \begin_layout Subsection
26689 \begin_inset Index idx
26694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26704 \begin_layout Standard
26705 الجذور يمكن إدراجها باستخدام الزرين
26708 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
26714 arg "math-insert \\root"
26737 خاص بالجذر التربيعي فقط،
26747 \begin_layout Subsection
26749 \begin_inset Index idx
26754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26762 \begin_inset Index idx
26767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26775 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26777 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
26784 \begin_layout Standard
26788 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
26792 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
26795 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
26796 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
26797 by entering them as you would enter a super- or subscript,
26798 directly after the symbol.
26799 The sum operator will automatically place its
26800 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26804 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26807 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas,
26808 and to the side in inline formulas,
26810 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
26817 \begin_inset Formula
26819 \sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
26828 will place the limits to the side in both formula types.
26831 \begin_layout Standard
26834 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in display mode.
26835 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly behind the operator and using the menu
26837 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26838 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26840 \begin_inset space ~
26844 \begin_inset space ~
26862 \begin_layout Standard
26865 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
26866 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26870 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26877 \begin_inset Index idx
26882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26892 \begin_inset Formula
26894 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
26899 which will place the
26900 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
26904 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26908 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26912 In inline formulas it looks like this:
26914 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
26920 \begin_layout Standard
26923 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
26930 Have a look at section
26931 \begin_inset space ~
26935 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26937 reference "subsec:Functions"
26942 for an explanation of function macros.
26945 \begin_layout Subsection
26947 \begin_inset Index idx
26952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26962 \begin_layout Standard
26965 Most math symbols can be found in the
26968 \begin_inset space ~
26973 under one of several categories;
26994 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS).
26997 \begin_layout Standard
27000 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27001 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use,
27002 you don't have to use the
27005 \begin_inset space ~
27011 you can type the command directly into the formula.
27013 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
27016 \begin_layout Subsection
27018 \begin_inset Index idx
27023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27033 \begin_layout Standard
27036 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that \SpecialChar LaTeX
27044 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
27052 \begin_inset space ~
27062 arg "math-insert \\space"
27068 This generates a small space,
27069 and shows a small marker on the screen.
27077 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
27080 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
27084 \begin_inset Graphics
27085 filename ../clipart/SpaceMarker.png
27092 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind the space marker and enter space again several times.
27093 With every space enter the size will be changed.
27094 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
27096 because they are negative spaces.
27097 Here are two examples:
27100 \begin_layout Standard
27112 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
27118 \begin_layout Standard
27130 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
27136 \begin_layout Subsection
27138 \begin_inset Index idx
27143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27151 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27153 name "subsec:Functions"
27160 \begin_layout Standard
27166 \begin_inset space ~
27171 contains under the button
27176 arg "math-insert \\functions"
27181 a number of function macros,
27183 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
27188 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
27197 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
27204 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to avoid confusions,
27206 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
27210 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
27216 \begin_layout Standard
27219 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
27221 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
27225 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
27231 \begin_layout Standard
27234 For some mathematical objects,
27236 the macro changes where subscripts are placed,
27237 as described in section
27238 \begin_inset space ~
27242 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27244 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
27252 \begin_layout Subsection
27254 \begin_inset Index idx
27259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27269 \begin_layout Standard
27272 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text mode.
27273 This may depend on your keyboard,
27274 or the bindings file you use.
27275 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
27279 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
27282 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
27283 Our example is entered by typing
27288 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
27295 \begin_inset space ~
27299 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27301 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
27306 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
27309 \begin_layout Standard
27310 \begin_inset Float table
27317 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27318 \begin_inset Caption Standard
27320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27321 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27323 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
27327 أسماء اللهجات والأوامر المقابلة لها.
27335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27337 \begin_inset Tabular
27338 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
27339 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
27340 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
27341 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
27342 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
27344 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27353 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27362 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27373 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27382 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27395 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27399 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
27409 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27418 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27431 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27435 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
27445 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27454 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27467 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27471 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
27481 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27484 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27490 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27503 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27507 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
27517 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27526 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27529 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27539 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27543 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
27553 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27562 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27575 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27579 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
27589 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27598 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27611 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27615 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
27625 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27634 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27637 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27647 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27651 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
27661 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27670 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27683 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27687 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
27697 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27706 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
27709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27719 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
27722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27723 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
27744 \begin_layout Standard
27747 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
27750 \begin_inset space ~
27760 arg "math-insert \\hat"
27766 this will apply to any selection you have made within a formula too.
27769 \begin_layout Section
27771 \begin_inset Index idx
27776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27784 \begin_inset Index idx
27789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27797 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27799 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
27806 \begin_layout Standard
27809 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
27812 using just the keys
27817 But if you want to surround a large structure,
27818 like a matrix or a fraction,
27819 or if you have several layers of brackets,
27820 it is better to use the math toolbar delimiter icon
27825 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
27832 if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
27833 \begin_inset Formula
27835 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
27843 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
27845 the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
27850 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
27855 and the expression on the right was entered using the
27861 \begin_inset Formula
27863 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
27871 \begin_layout Standard
27874 If you use the delimiter icon,
27876 and other brackets from that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is inside.
27879 \begin_layout Standard
27882 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the left side and right side.
27883 If you use the option
27886 \begin_inset space ~
27892 the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
27893 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
27895 If you want one side not to have a bracket,
27901 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
27902 with a dotted line,
27903 but nothing will be printed.
27906 \begin_layout Standard
27909 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures,
27910 like a square root,
27911 you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that is to go inside the brackets.
27912 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
27917 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses,
27920 on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
27922 to insert a pair of parentheses,
27923 select the structure and enter
27928 arg "math-delim ( )"
27934 \begin_layout Section
27935 المصفوفات والمعادلات متعددة الأسطر
27936 \begin_inset Index idx
27941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27949 \begin_inset Index idx
27954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27962 \begin_inset Index idx
27967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27969 معادلة متعددة الأسطر
27977 \begin_layout Standard
27978 المصفوفات يتم إدراجها في \SpecialChar LyX
27982 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
27986 وسيتم فتح نافذة تسمح بتحديد عدد الصفوف والأعمدة.
27988 \begin_inset Formula
27990 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
28001 The parentheses aren't automatic,
28002 but you can add them as described in section
28003 \begin_inset space ~
28007 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28009 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
28015 When you construct the matrix,
28016 you can decide whether the column entries will be left-,
28018 or center-justified.
28019 This alignment is set in the box
28024 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28032 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28037 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28045 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28050 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28058 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28064 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28072 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28075 for every column as default.
28078 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28086 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28089 means that the first column will be left-justified,
28090 the second will be centered,
28091 and the third column will be right-justified,
28092 because each letter corresponds to the relevant column.
28093 The result will look like this:
28094 \begin_inset Formula
28097 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
28098 column & has & has\,right\\
28099 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
28108 \begin_layout Standard
28111 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
28116 arg "newline-insert newline"
28121 while the cursor is in the matrix.
28122 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
28124 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28127 or the math toolbar.
28130 \begin_layout Standard
28133 There are other arrays used in formulas,
28134 such as distinctions of cases.
28135 It can be created with the menu
28137 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28138 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
28140 \begin_inset space ~
28152 Here is an example:
28154 \begin_inset Formula
28168 \begin_layout Standard
28171 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
28174 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
28179 arg "newline-insert newline"
28185 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear,
28186 one for each column.
28192 arg "newline-insert newline"
28197 in a non-empty formula,
28198 the part before the relation sign (equal sign
28199 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28203 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28206 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column,
28207 the relation sign is in the second column,
28208 and the rest in the third column.
28209 A new row is created by every further entry of
28214 arg "newline-insert newline"
28220 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
28221 Here is an example:
28222 \begin_inset Formula
28224 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
28225 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
28230 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
28231 \begin_inset Formula
28233 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
28241 \begin_layout Standard
28244 The multi-line formula type described here is called
28251 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
28252 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
28253 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28255 reference "eq:asquared"
28261 The other types are described in section
28262 \begin_inset space ~
28266 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28268 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
28276 \begin_layout Section
28277 المعادلة المرقمة والعلامة المرجعية
28278 \begin_inset Index idx
28283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28291 \begin_inset Index idx
28296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28304 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28306 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
28313 \begin_layout Standard
28316 To number a formula,
28317 set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
28319 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28320 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
28322 \begin_inset space ~
28326 \begin_inset space ~
28336 arg "math-number-toggle"
28342 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
28343 within parentheses.
28344 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
28345 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on the document class.
28346 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
28347 separated by a dot:
28348 \begin_inset Formula
28360 arg "math-number-toggle"
28365 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
28366 You can only number displayed formulas.
28369 \begin_layout Standard
28372 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line:
28375 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28376 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
28378 \begin_inset space ~
28382 \begin_inset space ~
28392 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
28397 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
28398 \begin_inset Formula
28401 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
28407 To number all lines use the shortcut
28412 arg "math-number-toggle"
28418 \begin_layout Standard
28421 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
28424 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
28425 A label is inserted with the menu
28427 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28440 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
28441 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
28442 It is recommended that you use the suggested
28443 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28451 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28454 as the first part of the label,
28455 because this helps later to identify the label type when you have many labels in your document.
28456 We inserted in the following example the label
28457 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28461 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28464 in the second line:
28465 \begin_inset Formula
28467 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
28468 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
28473 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
28474 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
28475 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
28477 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28479 \begin_inset space ~
28489 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
28495 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
28496 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
28497 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output as the formula number:
28500 \begin_layout Standard
28503 This is a cross-reference to equation (
28504 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28506 reference "eq:tanhExp"
28514 \begin_layout Standard
28517 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
28518 's cross-reference box are described in section
28519 \begin_inset space ~
28523 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28525 reference "sec:Cross-References"
28532 set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and press
28539 \begin_layout Standard
28542 and we can replace the equation number with any text by
28546 tag* which writing in the end of formula.
28549 \begin_layout Section
28550 تعيين المستخدم لماكرو رياضي
28551 \begin_inset Index idx
28556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28566 \begin_layout Standard
28570 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you have equations of the same form in a document several times.
28571 Math macros are explained in section
28574 \begin_inset space ~
28586 \begin_layout Section
28590 \begin_layout Subsection
28592 \begin_inset Index idx
28597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28607 \begin_layout Standard
28610 The standard font for text is italic,
28611 for numbers the standard is roman.
28612 To set a font in a formula,
28616 \begin_inset space ~
28626 arg "math-insert \\font"
28632 or enter its command,
28634 \begin_inset space ~
28638 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28640 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
28649 \begin_layout Standard
28650 \begin_inset Float table
28657 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28658 \begin_inset Caption Standard
28660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28661 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28663 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
28667 مظهر الخط والأمر الخاص به.
28675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28677 \begin_inset Tabular
28678 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="9" columns="2">
28679 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
28680 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
28681 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
28683 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28692 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28703 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28707 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
28715 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28730 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28734 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
28742 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28757 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28761 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
28769 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28784 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28788 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
28796 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28811 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28815 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
28823 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28838 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28842 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
28850 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28865 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28871 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
28879 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28894 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28898 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
28906 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
28909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28932 \begin_layout Standard
28935 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28945 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
28961 \begin_layout Standard
28964 When you use a typeface,
28965 a blue box is inserted in the formula.
28966 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
28971 within the box will set the cursor outside,
28972 so that you have to use a protected space when you need a space in the box.
28973 Here is an example where
28974 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28978 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28985 denotes the set of numbers:
28986 \begin_inset Formula
28988 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
28996 \begin_layout Standard
28999 The typefaces are nestable,
29000 which can cause confusion.
29013 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
29017 \begin_inset Newline newline
29020 So it is better not to use this feature.
29023 \begin_layout Standard
29026 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
29028 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
29032 \begin_inset Newline newline
29035 You can only print them emboldened using the command
29042 which works like the other typeface commands:
29044 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
29050 \begin_layout Standard
29058 works for all symbols,
29063 \begin_layout Standard
29066 A number of other font options are available as well,
29069 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
29070 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
29072 \begin_inset space ~
29080 \begin_layout Subsection
29082 \begin_inset Index idx
29087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29097 \begin_layout Standard
29100 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font,
29102 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text,
29103 which is obtained using the entry
29106 \begin_inset space ~
29110 \begin_inset space ~
29118 \begin_inset space ~
29128 arg "math-insert \\font"
29134 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
29135 in black instead of blue.
29136 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
29137 Here is an example:
29138 \begin_inset Formula
29141 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
29142 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
29151 \begin_layout Subsection
29153 \begin_inset Index idx
29158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29168 \begin_layout Standard
29171 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode,
29172 which are automatically chosen in most situations.
29193 For most characters,
29202 are actually the same size,
29204 superscripts and subscripts,
29205 and certain other structures,
29211 Except for some operators,
29212 which resize themselves to accommodate various situations,
29213 all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
29214 thinks are appropriate.
29215 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
29220 arg "math-insert \\style"
29226 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
29229 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
29233 which is normally in
29244 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
29248 The four styles are used in the following example:
29251 \begin_layout Standard
29254 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
29259 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
29264 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
29269 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
29275 \begin_layout Standard
29278 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset is set in a particular size with the menu
29280 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
29282 \begin_inset space ~
29288 all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
29290 if the base font size of the document is changed,
29291 all fonts will be adjusted to correspond.
29292 As an example here is a formula in the font size
29293 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29297 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29303 \begin_layout Standard
29308 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
29314 \begin_layout Section
29316 \begin_inset Index idx
29321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29328 \begin_inset Index idx
29333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29343 \begin_layout Standard
29347 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS) that are in common use.
29350 \begin_layout Subsection
29354 \begin_layout Standard
29357 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in the document by selecting the checkbox
29360 \begin_inset space ~
29364 \begin_inset space ~
29368 \begin_inset space ~
29375 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29380 \begin_inset Index idx
29385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29397 \begin_inset space ~
29403 AMS is needed for many math-constructs;
29404 so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
29405 -errors in formulas,
29406 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
29409 \begin_layout Subsection
29410 أنواع معادلات حزمة AMS
29411 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29413 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
29418 \begin_inset Index idx
29423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29425 معادلة متعددة الأسطر
29433 \begin_layout Standard
29436 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
29437 provides a selection of different formula types.
29439 allows you to choose between
29464 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
29466 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29474 for an explanation of these formula types.
29477 \begin_layout Chapter
29481 \begin_layout Section
29483 \begin_inset Index idx
29488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29495 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29497 name "sec:Cross-References"
29504 \begin_layout Standard
29507 One of \SpecialChar LyX
29508 's strengths is cross-references.
29509 You can reference every section,
29513 and list in the document.
29514 To reference a document part,
29515 you have to insert a label into it.
29516 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
29517 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
29520 \begin_layout Enumerate
29524 \begin_layout Enumerate
29525 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29527 name "enu:Second-item"
29534 \begin_layout Enumerate
29538 \begin_layout Standard
29541 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
29543 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29546 or by pressing the toolbar button
29557 A gray label box like this:
29561 \begin_inset Graphics
29562 filename ../clipart/label.png
29568 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
29570 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix,
29571 in our case the text
29572 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29580 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29585 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29593 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29597 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29601 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29605 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted;
29607 if you insert a label into a section heading,
29608 the suggested prefix will be
29609 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29617 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29623 \begin_layout Standard
29626 To reference the item,
29627 we refer to its label using the menu
29629 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29632 or the toolbar button
29637 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
29643 A gray cross-reference box like this:
29647 \begin_inset Graphics
29648 filename ../clipart/reference.png
29654 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels in the document.
29655 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
29656 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29664 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29668 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear in the output.
29671 \begin_layout Standard
29674 As an alternative to
29676 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29680 you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
29685 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted to the actual cursor position via the menu
29687 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
29703 \begin_layout Standard
29706 Here is our cross-reference:
29710 \begin_inset space ~
29714 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29716 reference "enu:Second-item"
29724 \begin_layout Standard
29727 It is recommended to use a protected space
29731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29734 described in section
29735 \begin_inset space ~
29739 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29741 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
29751 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly line breaks between them.
29754 \begin_layout Standard
29757 There are eight formats of cross-references:
29760 \begin_layout Description
29765 this is the default
29769 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29771 reference "fig:Two-images"
29779 \begin_layout Description
29783 prints the number within two parentheses,
29784 this is the style normally used to reference formulas,
29785 especially when the reference name
29786 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29790 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29797 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29799 reference "eq:tanhExp"
29807 \begin_layout Description
29811 prints the page number:
29815 \begin_inset space ~
29819 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29820 LatexCommand pageref
29821 reference "fig:Two-images"
29829 \begin_layout Description
29833 \begin_inset space ~
29837 \begin_inset space ~
29841 prints the text “on page” and the page number
29845 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29846 LatexCommand vpageref
29847 reference "fig:Two-images"
29853 \begin_inset Newline newline
29858 If the label is on the same page,
29859 it prints “on this page”;
29860 if the label is on a facing page in a two-sided document,
29861 it prints “on the facing page”;
29862 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page,
29863 it prints “on the previous page”;
29864 if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
29865 it prints “on the next page”.
29866 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
29869 \begin_layout Description
29873 \begin_inset space ~
29877 \begin_inset space ~
29881 \begin_inset space ~
29886 the text “on page” and the page number:
29888 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29890 reference "fig:Two-images"
29896 \begin_inset Newline newline
29899 If the label is on the same page,
29900 this format behaves like
29907 otherwise it behaves like
29911 \begin_inset space ~
29915 \begin_inset space ~
29924 \begin_layout Description
29928 \begin_inset space ~
29932 prints a self defined cross-reference format.
29933 \begin_inset Newline newline
29937 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
29940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29947 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29958 \begin_inset Index idx
29963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29971 \begin_inset Index idx
29976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29993 \begin_inset Newline newline
29996 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
29997 -package should be used for this feature by setting the option
29999 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
30003 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30004 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30012 is the default and preferred because
30016 supports only English documents.
30017 The format is specified by using the command
30029 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30030 preamble of the document.
30031 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label shortcut
30032 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30040 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30048 \begin_inset Newline newline
30055 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
30060 \begin_inset Newline newline
30071 predefines reference formats for all available types.
30072 This is especially true for the wide variety of mathematical `theorem' environments.
30073 So if you want to make formatted references to,
30076 then you will need to define the relevant format yourself.
30082 you might do so as follows:
30083 \begin_inset Newline newline
30090 newrefformat{prop}{Proposition
30095 \begin_inset Newline newline
30098 For more information about defining formatted references,
30099 have a look at the package documentation
30102 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30104 key "prettyref,refstyle"
30110 \begin_inset Newline newline
30123 will be available with formatted references only if you are using the
30130 \begin_layout Description
30134 \begin_inset space ~
30138 prints the caption or the name of the reference
30142 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30143 LatexCommand nameref
30144 reference "fig:Two-images"
30152 \begin_layout Description
30156 \begin_inset space ~
30160 prints only the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30161 label for the reference
30165 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30166 LatexCommand labelonly
30167 reference "fig:Two-images"
30173 \begin_inset Newline newline
30178 This allows for customization,
30179 using \SpecialChar TeX
30181 if you want to issue a command that \SpecialChar LyX
30188 then you may want to use the
30191 \begin_inset space ~
30197 which will output only the part of the reference following the
30198 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30202 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30206 This is the form needed for e.
30207 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
30211 \begin_inset space \space{}
30218 's range commands.The number and current page of the referenced document part in the output is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
30220 The varieties are adjusted in the field
30224 of the cross-reference window,
30225 that appears when you click on the cross-reference.
30228 \begin_layout Standard
30231 You can only use the style
30235 to reference numbered document parts,
30236 while the reference style
30240 is always possible.
30243 \begin_layout Standard
30246 If you want to reference a section,
30247 put the label in the section heading;
30248 for floats put the label in the caption;
30249 for footnotes put the label in it.
30250 Referencing formulas is explained in section
30253 \begin_inset space ~
30257 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30259 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
30267 \begin_layout Standard
30270 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
30274 \begin_inset space ~
30278 \begin_inset space ~
30283 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
30284 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
30287 \begin_inset space ~
30292 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
30293 You can also go back with the toolbar button
30298 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
30304 \begin_layout Standard
30307 You can change labels at any time.
30308 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you do not need to think about this.
30311 \begin_layout Standard
30314 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label,
30315 you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
30316 “BROKEN” in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead of the reference.
30319 \begin_layout Standard
30322 References are described in detail in the section
30323 \begin_inset space ~
30333 \begin_inset space ~
30341 \begin_layout Section
30342 جدول المحتويات والقوائم الأخرى
30343 \begin_inset Index idx
30348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30355 \begin_inset Index idx
30360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30368 \begin_inset Index idx
30373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30380 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30389 \begin_layout Subsection
30391 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30393 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
30400 \begin_layout Standard
30403 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
30405 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30406 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
30408 \begin_inset space ~
30412 \begin_inset space ~
30418 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
30420 If you click on it,
30426 showing you the TOC entries as outline,
30427 which allows you to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
30428 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
30430 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
30432 \begin_inset space ~
30437 that is described in section
30440 \begin_inset space ~
30444 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30446 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
30454 \begin_layout Standard
30457 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
30458 If you have declared a short title for a section heading,
30459 as described in section
30460 \begin_inset space ~
30464 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30466 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
30472 it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
30474 \begin_inset space ~
30478 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30480 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
30485 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are listed in the TOC.
30486 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
30489 \begin_layout Subsection
30493 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30495 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
30502 \begin_layout Standard
30507 listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table of contents.
30508 You can insert them via the
30510 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30514 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
30517 \begin_layout Section
30518 الروابط والروابط التشعبية
30519 \begin_inset Index idx
30524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30531 \begin_inset Index idx
30536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30545 \begin_layout Subsection
30547 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30556 \begin_layout Standard
30559 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
30561 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30567 \begin_layout Standard
30570 Here is an example URL:
30576 \begin_inset Flex URL
30579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30581 https://www.lyx.org
30589 \begin_layout Standard
30592 You cannot change the style of the link text,
30593 the URL text will always be in the style
30598 To be able to format the URL text,
30599 use hyperlinks as explained in the next subsection.
30602 \begin_layout Standard
30605 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30615 URLs must not end with a backslash,
30616 otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
30625 \begin_layout Subsection
30627 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30629 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
30636 \begin_layout Standard
30639 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
30641 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30644 or with the toolbar button
30655 The appearing dialog has two fields:
30665 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
30666 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this
30670 \begin_inset CommandInset href
30672 name "LyX's homepage"
30673 target "https://www.lyx.org"
30681 an Email address like this:
30683 \begin_inset CommandInset href
30685 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
30686 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
30693 or a link to a file.
30698 in the hyperlink settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
30706 \begin_layout Standard
30709 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by adding the prefix
30710 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30718 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30721 to the link target.
30724 \begin_layout Standard
30727 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
30728 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
30729 To set the format of the link text,
30730 highlight the hyperlink inset and use the text style dialog.
30731 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
30736 \begin_inset CommandInset href
30738 name "LyX's homepage"
30739 target "https://www.lyx.org"
30747 \begin_layout Standard
30750 The link text color can be changed,
30755 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
30757 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30758 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30762 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the option
30763 \begin_inset Newline newline
30771 \begin_inset Newline newline
30778 in the PDF Properties dialog.
30781 \begin_layout Section
30783 \begin_inset Index idx
30788 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30795 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30797 name "sec:Appendices"
30804 \begin_layout Standard
30807 Appendices are created with the menu
30809 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30811 \begin_inset space ~
30815 \begin_inset space ~
30821 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end as the appendix part of the book.
30822 This part is marked with a red borderline.
30825 \begin_layout Standard
30828 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
30829 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
30830 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot and the subsection number.
30831 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
30835 \begin_layout Standard
30839 \begin_inset space ~
30843 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30845 reference "chap:Credits"
30852 \begin_inset space ~
30856 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30858 reference "subsec:Export"
30866 \begin_layout Section
30868 \begin_inset Index idx
30873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30880 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30882 name "sec:Bibliography"
30889 \begin_layout Standard
30892 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
30894 You can include a bibliography database,
30895 which is explained in sec.
30896 \begin_inset space ~
30900 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30902 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
30911 or you can insert the bibliography manually,
30912 using the paragraph environment
30917 which is described in the following section (but see also sec.
30918 \begin_inset space ~
30922 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30924 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
30930 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in this document,
30931 such as author-year citations,
30932 and if you have more than a handful of references,
30933 then you should seriously consider
30937 using a bibliography database.
30940 \begin_layout Standard
30943 In order to demonstrate the difference between these two approaches,
30944 we use two bibliographies in this document,
30949 environment and a database-generated bibliography.
30951 the bibliography that is created from a database lists only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
30953 the database approach relieves you,
30954 amongst other things,
30955 from the burden to check which entries you have actually cited.
30958 \begin_layout Subsection
30960 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30962 name "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
30969 \begin_layout Standard
30977 every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled with a number.
30978 If you click on it,
30979 you will get a dialog in which you can set a
30988 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography entry.
30989 Each entry needs to be given a unique key,
30990 which is one word consisting of ASCII characters only.
30994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30998 \begin_inset CommandInset href
31001 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set"
31007 \begin_inset Newline newline
31011 \begin_inset Flex URL
31014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31016 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII
31029 our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
31031 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31035 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31039 a short form of its title,
31041 \begin_inset Newline newline
31049 references to it will appear with this label instead of the number of the entry.
31054 in the bibliography items settings dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
31062 \begin_layout Standard
31065 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
31067 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31070 or the toolbar button
31075 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
31081 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear containing the available citations.
31082 Select one or more keys from the list and
31092 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
31093 If you click on the box,
31094 the citation window will appear and you can change the reference.
31097 \begin_layout Standard
31100 Citation references appear in the output as the number or the label of the bibliography entry with surrounding brackets.
31101 Here are two examples;
31102 the first without a label,
31103 the second with the label
31104 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31108 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31114 \begin_layout Standard
31120 Companion Second Edition
31124 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31126 key "latexcompanion"
31134 \begin_layout Standard
31137 The \SpecialChar LyX
31138 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
31140 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31150 \begin_layout Standard
31153 You can also produce author-year or author-number citations,
31154 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31162 \begin_inset Index idx
31167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31178 the label needs to be given the form
31179 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31183 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31187 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31190 Author A and Author B(Year)
31191 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31198 a blank between the author(s) and the opening parenthesis that delimits the year.
31203 \begin_inset space ~
31208 in the document settings
31211 \begin_inset Index idx
31216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31227 Bibliography\SpecialChar menuseparator
31229 \begin_inset space ~
31235 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31237 reference "subsec:Citation-Format"
31246 you can select between different author-year or author-number styles.
31249 \begin_layout Standard
31252 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest label via the menu
31254 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
31256 \begin_inset space ~
31266 arg "layout-paragraph"
31272 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
31275 \begin_layout Subsection
31276 قاعدة بيانات ثبت المراجع
31277 \begin_inset Index idx
31282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31290 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31292 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
31299 \begin_layout Standard
31302 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same references in different documents.
31306 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31309 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning them.
31310 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations and reviews along with bibliographical information.
31315 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography entries.
31316 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of your working field in a database.
31317 This database can be used for different documents,
31318 and by default only the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography list for that document.
31319 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books you have cited.
31322 \begin_layout Standard
31325 The database is a text file with the file extension
31326 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31334 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31338 containing the bibliography in a special format.
31339 The format is explained in
31342 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31351 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31353 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31355 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
31361 The file can be created using any text editor,
31362 but normally one uses a special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
31363 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
31367 \begin_inset Flex URL
31370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31372 https://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
31380 \begin_layout Standard
31384 supports two different approaches to use bibliography databases in a document.
31385 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31386 is the classic technique that has been the only way to use such databases for a long time.
31387 It is quite established and mature and there is a huge range of existing styles available.
31388 But it has its drawbacks,
31389 especially when it comes to more complex bibliographic needs and support for specific languages and scripts.
31390 Those are addressed by
31396 \begin_inset Index idx
31401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31411 It reads the same database format than Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31412 (although it has been significantly extended beyond Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31425 can handle any classic Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31427 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31428 might conversely fail to correctly handle databases that use specific
31438 but it uses a different framework to generate citations and references from it.
31441 \begin_layout Standard
31444 To select if Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31450 set in the document settings (menu
31452 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31458 \begin_inset Index idx
31463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31479 \begin_inset space ~
31484 to a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31492 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31493 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31495 \begin_inset Index idx
31500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31502 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31511 \begin_layout Standard
31514 To access a database via Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31518 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31523 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
31525 \begin_inset space ~
31531 A window will appear in which you can add one or more databases and select a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31539 Add bibliography to TOC
31541 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
31546 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database in the document or just the cited references.
31549 \begin_layout Standard
31552 The Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31553 style file is a text file with the file extension
31554 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31562 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31565 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
31566 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
31567 distribution should provide several of these,
31568 and many publishers provide their own style files,
31569 so that you don't have to take care of the layout.
31570 It is of course possible to write your own style file,
31571 but this is something for experts.
31575 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31578 For information on how this is done,
31580 \begin_inset Newline newline
31584 \begin_inset CommandInset href
31586 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
31596 In this document we used the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31602 which provides an alpha-numeric style.
31605 \begin_layout Standard
31608 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
31611 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31613 \begin_inset Index idx
31618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31626 \begin_inset Index idx
31631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31641 \begin_layout Standard
31644 Accessing a database via
31648 is almost identical to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31652 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31657 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
31659 \begin_inset space ~
31665 In contrary to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31666 you cannot select a
31671 The other dialog options are the same as with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31675 \begin_layout Standard
31681 has two different style files:
31682 a bibliography style file (text file with the file extension
31683 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31691 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31694 ) controls how the bibliography entries will look like and a citation style file (text file with the file extension
31695 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31703 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31706 ) controls the look of the citation references in the text.
31707 Usually such style files come in pairs and it makes sense to use matching styles.
31708 It is nevertheless possible to mix any citation style with any bibliography style.
31711 \begin_layout Standard
31717 styles are not set in the
31720 \begin_inset space ~
31726 but in the document settings
31729 \begin_inset Index idx
31734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31744 in the dialog in the
31749 which is only visible if you use
31754 you can enter options that determine how the bibliography is printed (for example how its heading will appear).
31755 These options are deescribed in detail in the
31761 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31771 \begin_layout Standard
31774 Inserting a citation reference works as described in section
31777 \begin_inset space ~
31781 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31783 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
31794 \begin_layout Subsubsection
31798 \begin_layout Standard
31801 To generate the bibliography from a database,
31803 uses a bibliography processor,
31804 that is an external program that reads the database,
31805 sorts the citations and processes the data in a way it can be included in the document.
31806 The classic program is called Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31808 It has the advantage that it is very mature and widespread,
31809 but the disadvantage that it has severe limitations,
31813 \begin_layout Standard
31817 some alternatives have been developed that address some of these limitations.
31818 LyX natively supports some of them and lets you select a custom processor.
31819 You can do this on a general level in
31821 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
31822 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
31823 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
31826 or for individual documents in
31828 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31829 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31833 The following variants are available by default:
31836 \begin_layout Description
31843 \begin_inset Index idx
31848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31857 developed exclusively for
31861 (it does not work with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31867 provides full Unicode support,
31868 unlimited memory and many specific features
31878 it is strongly recommended to use
31885 \begin_layout Description
31888 bibtex the standard;
31889 does not allow special characters in bibliography entries that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding,
31891 works with all bibliography packages,
31892 although it will probably fail with
31896 bibliographies due to the limited memory.
31899 \begin_layout Description
31902 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding (but no Unicode support),
31908 works with all bibliography packages,
31909 although more complex
31913 bibliographies will exceed its limits,
31918 features are supported.
31921 \begin_layout Standard
31924 By default (with the
31930 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31931 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31944 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
31945 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
31946 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
31951 selects an appropriate (available) processor for the current bibliography approach (
31964 for Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31965 -based bibliography styles).
31966 This should suit most needs.
31969 \begin_layout Standard
31972 In Japanese documents,
31973 a specific processor is used.
31974 By default this is pBib\SpecialChar TeX
31975 (in \SpecialChar LyX
31981 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
31982 variant specifically aimed at Japanese.
31983 You can adjust it in
31985 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
31986 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
31987 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
31993 \begin_layout Standard
31996 Selected bibliography processors can be controlled with options that you can add below the selection.
31997 Before adding options,
31998 it is strongly recommended that you read the manual of Bib\SpecialChar TeX
32007 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32017 \begin_layout Subsubsection
32021 \begin_layout Standard
32025 supports some specific tasks such as sectioned bibliographies and multiple bibliographies.
32026 These are explained in detail in section
32028 Customizing Bibliographies
32032 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
32037 Additional Features
32042 \begin_layout Subsection
32044 \begin_inset Index idx
32049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32057 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32059 name "subsec:Citation-Format"
32066 \begin_layout Standard
32069 Many different citation formats are common,
32071 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32075 \begin_inset space \space{}
32078 numerical citation (as
32079 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32083 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32086 like in this document),
32087 alpha-numerical citations (as
32088 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32092 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32095 ) or author-year citations (as
32096 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32100 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32105 supports these formats via specific citation packages and their style files.
32108 \begin_layout Standard
32111 By default a simple numeric citation style is used.
32114 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32115 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32120 \begin_inset Index idx
32125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32134 you have a range of other options,
32135 depending on your preferred bibliography approach.
32140 environment your only choice besides manual formatting of the bibliography labels,
32144 \begin_inset space ~
32155 \begin_inset space ~
32160 which gives you author-year and author-numerical citations (see above
32161 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32163 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
32171 \begin_layout Standard
32174 With a bibliography database (see
32175 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32177 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
32185 ) one has in contrary to the
32189 environment full access to the formatting styles.
32190 These style formats are available:
32193 \begin_layout Description
32197 \begin_inset space ~
32200 (BibTeX) the default Bib\SpecialChar TeX
32201 -based approached without any additional packages (simple numeric citations).
32204 \begin_layout Description
32207 Biblatex loads the package
32214 \begin_inset Index idx
32219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32228 and lets you select a style in the dropdown boxes
32230 Biblatex citation style
32234 Biblatex bibliography style
32237 Options to the package
32241 can be entered in the
32248 \begin_layout Description
32252 \begin_inset space ~
32256 \begin_inset space ~
32259 mode) loads the package
32263 with the natbib compatibility mode.
32264 This is a specific variant for users who switch an existing document that uses
32275 behavior very closely.
32280 this option has some additional styles.
32285 styles are also supported by this variant.
32288 \begin_layout Description
32292 \begin_inset space ~
32295 (BibTeX) loads the package
32302 \begin_inset Index idx
32307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32316 which provides author-year styles particularly suited for law studies.
32319 \begin_layout Description
32323 \begin_inset space ~
32326 (BibTeX) loads the package
32333 \begin_inset Index idx
32338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32347 which provides citation styles particularly suited for the humanities.
32350 \begin_layout Standard
32361 style formats provide the choice between author-year and author-numerical citation styles.
32362 You have to select one style in the dropdown box
32372 this only affects the appearance in the \SpecialChar LyX
32374 Whether the output uses numerical,
32375 author-year or another format such as alpha-numerical depends only on the selected
32377 Biblatex citation style
32381 when switching between Author-year and Author-number,
32382 a suitable style is proposed.
32389 the dialog selection will ultimately determine the style.
32392 \begin_layout Standard
32395 For any author-year and author-numerical selection,
32396 multiple style variants are available in the
32401 Some selections also provide further options like the option to uppercase a name prefix such as
32402 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32406 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32410 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32414 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32417 ) or to expand or reduce the number of displayed others (i.
32418 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32422 \begin_inset space \space{}
32426 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32430 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32437 \begin_layout Standard
32440 In the citation dialog you can also set text to appear after a citation reference,
32442 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32446 \begin_inset space \space{}
32450 which will then be formatted according to the style's needs (e.
32451 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32455 \begin_inset space \space{}
32459 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32463 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32471 in the citation dialog allows to input \SpecialChar TeX
32475 \begin_inset space ~
32483 \begin_inset space ~
32489 Here is a simple example where the text
32490 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32494 \begin_inset space ~
32498 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32501 appears after the reference:
32504 \begin_layout Quote
32510 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32513 key "latexcompanion"
32521 \begin_layout Standard
32524 All styles except for
32528 also provide the feature to add text that precedes the reference (such as
32529 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32533 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32537 This text is then also included in the parentheses,
32538 if the style requires this.
32541 \begin_layout Standard
32544 Note that these pre- and postnotes apply to the whole citation.
32545 So if you refer to multiple references at once,
32546 the prenote will precede the first citation in the list,
32547 the postnote will follow the last.
32552 styles allow to add pre- and postnotes to any individual reference in a multi-citation (so-called
32553 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32556 qualified citation lists
32557 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32563 If you use such a style and if the current reference includes multiple items the
32567 dialog will display three columns in the field
32575 \begin_inset space ~
32584 \begin_inset space ~
32592 \begin_inset space ~
32598 If you double-click on an item's
32601 \begin_inset space ~
32609 \begin_inset space ~
32615 you can add such individual pre- and postnotes.
32618 General text before
32624 fields you can add pre- and postnotes that apply to the whole list.
32627 \begin_layout Section
32629 \begin_inset Index idx
32634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32641 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32650 \begin_layout Standard
32653 An index entry is created if you use the menu
32655 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32657 \begin_inset space ~
32662 or the toolbar button
32673 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
32674 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed by \SpecialChar LyX
32675 as the index entry.
32678 \begin_layout Standard
32681 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
32683 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32684 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
32686 \begin_inset space ~
32692 A light blue box labeled
32693 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32701 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32704 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
32705 The index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
32709 \begin_layout Standard
32712 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
32713 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
32714 's index mechanism,
32715 have a look at one of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32717 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32719 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
32727 \begin_layout Subsection
32729 \begin_inset Index idx
32734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32744 \begin_layout Standard
32747 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the index.
32748 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated lists under the entry
32749 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32753 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32757 First we create the entry
32758 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32762 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32766 \begin_inset space ~
32770 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32772 reference "subsec:Lists"
32778 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
32779 \begin_inset space ~
32783 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32785 reference "sec:Itemize"
32791 we insert the command
32794 \begin_layout Standard
32802 \begin_layout Standard
32808 \begin_layout Standard
32816 \begin_layout Standard
32819 for the enumerated list in section
32820 \begin_inset space ~
32824 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32826 reference "sec:Enumerate"
32834 \begin_layout Standard
32837 The exclamation mark
32838 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32842 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32845 marks the grouping levels.
32846 You can have three levels;
32847 every index level is indented a bit more.
32848 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
32849 If we don't have an index entry for
32850 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32854 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32858 it will be printed anyway,
32859 but without a page number.
32862 \begin_layout Subsection
32864 \begin_inset Index idx
32869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32879 \begin_layout Standard
32882 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed section.
32883 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
32885 if we want to index the paragraph environments,
32886 we create an index entry in section
32887 \begin_inset space ~
32891 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32893 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
32901 \begin_layout Standard
32905 Paragraph environments|(
32908 \begin_layout Standard
32911 and another entry at the end of section
32912 \begin_inset space ~
32916 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32918 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
32926 \begin_layout Standard
32930 Paragraph environments|)
32933 \begin_layout Standard
32937 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32945 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32949 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32957 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32960 respectively start and end the index range.
32961 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
32962 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of the pages of the indexed document parts.
32963 An example is the index entry
32964 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32969 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32975 \begin_layout Subsection
32977 \begin_inset Index idx
32982 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32992 \begin_layout Standard
32995 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
32996 We referred for example in the index entry
32997 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33001 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33005 \begin_inset space ~
33009 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33011 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
33016 ) to the index entry
33017 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33021 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33024 in the same section using the entry
33027 \begin_layout Standard
33031 GIF|see{Image formats}
33034 \begin_layout Standard
33037 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
33039 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
33040 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
33043 \begin_layout Subsection
33045 \begin_inset Index idx
33050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33060 \begin_layout Standard
33063 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not follow the rules for the index order.
33064 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
33069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33072 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program,
33074 \begin_inset space ~
33078 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33080 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
33090 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
33091 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
33092 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33096 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33101 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33105 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33110 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33114 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33120 \begin_inset Index idx
33125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33133 \begin_inset Index idx
33138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33146 \begin_inset Index idx
33151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33160 They will be sorted in the order maïs,
33162 maison but we want the order maïs,
33169 \begin_layout Standard
33173 previous entry@current entry
33176 \begin_layout Standard
33179 In our case we want to have
33180 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33184 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33188 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33192 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33195 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
33198 \begin_layout Standard
33205 \begin_layout Standard
33208 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
33209 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
33211 See the next subsection for an example.
33214 \begin_layout Subsection
33216 \begin_inset Index idx
33221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33231 \begin_layout Standard
33234 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog
33237 \begin_inset Index idx
33242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33246 هذا مدخل مجسم إيطالي
33253 You can also format the page number using the character
33254 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33258 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33261 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
33262 -command without a backslash.
33263 We can write for example
33266 \begin_layout Standard
33269 رقم صفحة إيطالي:|textit
33272 \begin_layout Standard
33275 to get the page number in italic.
33278 \begin_inset Index idx
33283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33285 ترقيم صفحة إيطالي :|textit
33292 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
33293 -commands begin with a backslash,
33294 but in this special case
33295 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33303 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33311 \begin_inset space ~
33317 Have a look at section
33318 \begin_inset space ~
33322 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33324 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
33329 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33333 \begin_layout Standard
33336 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
33339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33346 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
33350 to generate the index,
33352 \begin_inset space ~
33356 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33358 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
33369 this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
33374 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used,
33376 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33379 key "latexcompanion"
33392 \begin_layout Standard
33396 we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown above.
33398 you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
33399 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of the indexed term,
33400 so that users can easily find definitions.
33402 put the following in the preamble
33405 \begin_layout Standard
33417 \begin_layout Standard
33421 \begin_layout Standard
33428 \begin_layout Standard
33434 \begin_inset Index idx
33439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33450 The advantage is that,
33451 if you change your mind later or if your publisher insists that definitions must not be italic but bold,
33452 you just need to change the macro in the preamble,
33453 not every single index entry.
33456 \begin_layout Standard
33459 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
33461 we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get a bold font for all index entries.
33462 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
33475 documentation for details,
33477 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33479 key "makeindex,xindy"
33487 \begin_layout Subsection
33489 \begin_inset Index idx
33494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33502 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33504 name "subsec:Index-Program"
33511 \begin_layout Standard
33514 If the index generation program
33520 uses it for index generation;
33521 otherwise the program
33526 the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
33532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33539 no longer under development and has many pitfalls,
33540 notably that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
33541 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
33542 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
33544 if you are writing in another than the English language,
33554 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
33555 's preferences dialog,
33557 \begin_inset space ~
33561 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33563 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
33569 The available options are listed and explained in
33570 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33572 key "makeindex-man,xindy"
33579 you can also specify an alternative program to generate the index.
33582 \begin_layout Standard
33585 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a given document,
33586 you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
33589 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33590 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33594 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
33597 \begin_layout Subsection
33601 \begin_layout Standard
33604 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
33606 you might need to set up a separate
33607 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33611 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33614 next to the standard index.
33616 does not provide this possibility out of the box,
33617 but there are packages that add this feature.
33626 \begin_inset Index idx
33631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33640 package to generate multiple indexes.
33641 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
33646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33649 If yours does not ship it,
33650 consult the \SpecialChar TeX
33653 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33661 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
33663 but it also includes specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
33664 Please consult the package's manual for details.
33672 \begin_layout Standard
33675 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
33676 for the use of multiple indexes,
33679 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33680 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33683 and select the option
33685 Use multiple Indexes
33692 already contains the standard index
33693 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33697 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33701 To add further indexes,
33702 add the name of the index (in the form that should also appear as a heading) to the
33706 input field and press the
33711 The new index now also appears in the list.
33713 you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
33714 label color to the new index.
33717 \begin_layout Standard
33720 Once the document changes have been applied,
33721 you can find the new index list in
33723 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33730 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
33731 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index,
33732 but there are additional features:
33735 \begin_layout Itemize
33738 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry,
33739 right-clicking on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
33742 \begin_layout Itemize
33745 By right-clicking on an index,
33746 you can change its type.
33748 you can specify an index to be a
33754 the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
33756 if you use a book class,
33757 where the standard index heading is defined as a chapter,
33758 subindexes will be defined as sections and can thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
33761 \begin_layout Itemize
33768 allows to use \SpecialChar TeX
33769 code in the name of the index.
33772 \begin_layout Section
33773 المصطلحات/قاموس الكلمات
33774 \begin_inset Index idx
33779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33786 \begin_inset Index idx
33791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33820 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33822 name "sec:Nomenclature"
33829 \begin_layout Standard
33832 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so called nomenclature or glossary.
33835 \begin_layout Standard
33838 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries,
33839 you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33847 \begin_inset Index idx
33852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33862 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
33865 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33872 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
33876 \begin_layout Standard
33879 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry and then use the menu
33881 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33887 \begin_inset space ~
33892 or the toolbar button
33897 arg "nomencl-insert"
33904 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33912 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33915 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
33918 \begin_layout Standard
33921 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
33922 The first is the term or
33926 that you wish to define.
33931 of the term or symbol.
33934 \begin_layout Standard
33937 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
33940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33947 To use \SpecialChar TeX
33948 code for nomenclature entries the option
33952 in the nomenclature dialog has to be used.
33960 \begin_layout Subsection
33962 \begin_inset Index idx
33967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33977 \begin_layout Standard
33980 If you have symbols in formulas,
33981 you have to define them in the
33985 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
33988 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33992 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
33996 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34001 \begin_inset Newline newline
34009 \begin_inset Newline newline
34015 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34019 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34022 character starts/ends the formula.
34023 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
34024 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with a backslash
34025 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34031 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34035 For capital Greek letters,
34036 start the command also with a capital letter,
34046 \begin_layout Standard
34049 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34050 syntax is given in section
34051 \begin_inset space ~
34055 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34057 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
34065 \begin_layout Standard
34071 \begin_inset space ~
34076 dialog to format the description text;
34077 you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
34079 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
34080 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34084 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
34088 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34091 in this document is:
34092 \begin_inset Newline newline
34097 dummy entry for the character
34102 \begin_inset Newline newline
34114 \begin_inset space ~
34124 font use the command
34155 \begin_layout Standard
34158 To customize the appearance of all symbols add e.
34159 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34163 \begin_inset space \space{}
34167 \begin_inset Newline newline
34183 \begin_inset Newline newline
34186 to the LaTeX preamble in the document settings.
34187 This command will make the font of all symbols
34194 \begin_inset space ~
34202 \begin_layout Standard
34205 If the characters |
34206 \begin_inset space \space{}
34210 \begin_inset space \space{}
34214 \begin_inset space \space{}
34219 \begin_inset space \space{}
34223 \begin_inset space \space{}
34226 should appear in nomenclature entries containing \SpecialChar TeX
34227 code they need to be escaped by adding a quote character in front of them.
34228 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
34229 LatexCommand nomenclature
34230 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
34231 description "The quote sign in TeX code is output by writing ' \"\" '."
34239 \begin_layout Subsection
34240 فرز وترتيب المصطلحات
34241 \begin_inset Index idx
34246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34256 \begin_layout Standard
34259 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34260 -code of the symbol definition.
34261 This leads to undesired results when you,
34263 have symbols in formulas.
34264 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
34267 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
34268 LatexCommand nomenclature
34270 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
34278 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
34282 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
34283 LatexCommand nomenclature
34286 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
34292 They will be sorted by
34293 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34301 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34305 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34315 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34319 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
34322 will be sorted before the
34326 since the character
34327 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34331 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34334 is considered in sorting.
34337 \begin_layout Standard
34340 To control the sort order,
34344 \begin_inset space ~
34349 field of the nomenclature dialog.
34350 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol definition.
34351 For the example given,
34356 in this field for the
34357 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
34365 will be located before
34366 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
34372 \begin_layout Standard
34375 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
34381 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34391 \begin_layout Subsection
34393 \begin_inset Index idx
34398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34406 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34408 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
34415 \begin_layout Standard
34422 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
34423 Here are some of its options;
34424 for more have a look at its documentation:
34427 \begin_layout Description
34430 refeq Appends the phrase
34431 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34444 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34447 to every nomenclature entry,
34454 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
34457 \begin_layout Description
34460 refpage Appends the phrase
34461 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34474 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34477 to every nomenclature entry,
34484 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
34487 \begin_layout Description
34490 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
34493 \begin_layout Standard
34496 To use one or more of the options,
34497 add them to the comma-separated document class options list in the
34499 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34503 In this document the options
34511 \begin_layout Standard
34512 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
34518 \begin_layout Standard
34521 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
34525 field in the nomenclature dialog:
34528 \begin_layout Description
34540 \begin_layout Description
34545 nomrefpage Like the
34552 \begin_layout Description
34557 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
34566 \begin_layout Description
34572 \begin_inset space ~
34578 \begin_inset space ~
34583 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
34586 \begin_layout Standard
34590 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34594 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34597 are automatically translated for most document languages.
34599 add these lines in front of the nomenclature list as \SpecialChar TeX
34603 \begin_layout Standard
34613 \begin_inset Newline newline
34619 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
34622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34625 \begin_inset space ~
34641 \begin_inset Newline newline
34648 pagedeclaration}[1]{
34649 \begin_inset Newline newline
34655 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
34658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34661 \begin_inset space ~
34679 \begin_layout Standard
34682 If the numbers should be hyperlinks,
34683 assure that you use
34686 \begin_inset space ~
34691 in the document settings under
34694 \begin_inset space ~
34702 \begin_layout Standard
34711 \begin_inset Newline newline
34715 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
34718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34721 \begin_inset space ~
34734 hyperlink{equation.#1}{equation
34736 nobreakspace{}(#1)}}
34737 \begin_inset Newline newline
34744 pagedeclaration}[1]{
34745 \begin_inset Newline newline
34749 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
34752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34755 \begin_inset space ~
34768 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
34773 \begin_layout Subsection
34775 \begin_inset Index idx
34780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34790 \begin_layout Standard
34793 To print the nomenclature,
34796 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34797 Lists/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
34802 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34810 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34813 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
34814 By right-clicking on it,
34815 the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
34816 You can choose between these settings:
34819 \begin_layout Description
34820 افتراضي المسافة المستخدمة 1
34821 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34827 \begin_layout Description
34829 \begin_inset space ~
34833 \begin_inset space ~
34836 طويل the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
34839 \begin_layout Description
34843 \begin_layout Standard
34846 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
34847 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34851 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34855 If you are not happy with the name,
34856 you can change it by redefining the command
34864 in order to change the name to
34869 add the following line to the preamble:
34872 \begin_layout Standard
34886 nomname{List of Symbols}}}
34889 \begin_layout Standard
34892 When you are using another document language than English,
34894 \begin_inset Newline newline
34910 where *** is the name of the language used.
34913 \begin_layout Subsection
34915 \begin_inset Index idx
34920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34928 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34930 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
34937 \begin_layout Standard
34946 that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
34948 to generate the nomenclature.
34950 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
34956 \begin_inset space ~
34960 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
34962 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
34968 The available options are listed and explained in
34969 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34971 key "nomencl,makeindex"
34979 \begin_layout Section
34981 \begin_inset Index idx
34986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34993 \begin_inset Index idx
34998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35006 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35008 name "sec:Branches"
35015 \begin_layout Standard
35018 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
35019 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the pupils to see the answers,
35020 but having questions and answers in the same document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
35023 \begin_layout Standard
35026 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
35027 allows you to put text into branches.
35028 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
35029 To create a branch,
35030 either select the menu
35032 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35033 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
35036 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
35038 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35046 where you can specify and change the name of the branch,
35047 its activation state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
35048 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
35049 and whether the name of the branch should be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active (see below for an example).
35051 the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch to the name of the other) and to add
35052 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35056 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35060 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35064 \begin_inset space ~
35067 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents,
35068 without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
35071 \begin_layout Standard
35074 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
35075 These boxes are inserted via the menu
35077 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35080 where you can choose a branch.
35081 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking on them.
35084 \begin_layout Standard
35087 Here is an example,
35088 where only the question text appears,
35089 the answer branch is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
35092 \begin_layout Standard
35095 \begin_inset Branch Question
35099 \begin_layout Standard
35105 من هو أول فيزيائي يفوز بجازة نوبل؟
35113 \begin_layout Standard
35116 \begin_inset Branch Answer
35120 \begin_layout Standard
35126 وليام كونراد رونتجن.
35134 \begin_layout Standard
35143 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35144 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35148 the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
35149 Consider for example a file
35150 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35154 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35157 which has the above branches.
35159 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35163 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35167 the PDF export file would be called
35168 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35172 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35176 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35180 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35184 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35188 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35191 branch were inactive,
35193 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35197 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35201 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35205 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35210 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35214 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35218 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35222 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35227 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35230 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
35231 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35234 if both branches were active.
35235 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
35236 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
35242 \begin_layout Standard
35245 There are also inverted branch insets,
35246 whose content is output just in case the branch is
35251 This make it easy to add alternative text for different versions of a document.
35252 To control whether a particular inset is inverted,
35253 right-click on the inset button and choose
35256 \begin_inset space ~
35264 \begin_layout Standard
35267 \begin_inset Branch Answer
35271 \begin_layout Standard
35279 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35283 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35286 branch is deactivated.
35292 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
35298 \begin_layout Standard
35301 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
35302 like inside equations,
35303 you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
35304 definitions for each branch.
35305 For example you can define for the question branch
35309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35312 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35315 \begin_inset space ~
35319 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
35321 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
35334 \begin_layout Standard
35345 \begin_layout Standard
35356 \begin_layout Standard
35359 and for the answer branch
35362 \begin_layout Standard
35373 \begin_layout Standard
35384 \begin_layout Standard
35387 \begin_inset Branch Question
35391 \begin_layout Standard
35397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35425 \begin_layout Standard
35428 \begin_inset Branch Answer
35432 \begin_layout Standard
35438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35466 \begin_layout Standard
35469 Now it is possible to use the
35473 question{\SpecialChar ldots
35480 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
35483 commands to obtain conditional output.
35484 Here is an example formula where only the
35493 \begin_inset Formula
35495 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
35503 \begin_layout Standard
35507 the same effect can be achieved using math macros,
35515 \begin_layout Standard
35518 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout files (e.
35519 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35523 \begin_inset space \space{}
35526 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
35528 For this advanced usage,
35536 Flex insets and InsetLayout
35541 \begin_layout Section
35543 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35545 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
35550 \begin_inset Index idx
35555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35564 \begin_layout Standard
35569 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35570 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35573 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your document.
35574 All these options are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35582 \begin_inset Index idx
35587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35596 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
35597 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced part of the document.
35601 \begin_layout Standard
35604 The header information in the dialog tab
35608 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
35609 Many programs are able to extract this information,
35611 automatically to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
35612 This is very useful to sort,
35613 classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
35617 \begin_inset space ~
35621 \begin_inset space ~
35628 tries to extract the header information from your document title and author entries.
35632 \begin_inset space ~
35636 \begin_inset space ~
35640 \begin_inset space ~
35645 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode,
35646 which is useful for presentations.
35649 \begin_layout Standard
35652 You can specify in the dialog tab
35656 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences are created.
35660 \begin_inset space ~
35664 \begin_inset space ~
35668 \begin_inset space ~
35673 option allows long links to be split;
35677 \begin_inset space ~
35681 \begin_inset space ~
35685 \begin_inset space ~
35693 \begin_inset space ~
35698 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
35702 \begin_inset space ~
35707 colors the different links.
35708 The default colors are:
35711 \begin_layout Labeling
35712 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
35717 للروابط والروابط التشعبية
35720 \begin_layout Labeling
35721 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
35729 \begin_layout Labeling
35730 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
35738 \begin_layout Standard
35741 but you can change these in the field
35747 in this document they were changed with the additional options:
35750 \begin_layout Standard
35760 \begin_layout Standard
35768 the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different entries,
35770 depending on the option selected,
35771 the number of the section,
35772 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
35775 \begin_layout Standard
35782 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
35783 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections or not.
35792 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks when opening the PDF.
35794 \begin_inset space ~
35797 2 will display all sections and subsections,
35799 \begin_inset space ~
35802 1 will only display the sections.
35805 \begin_layout Standard
35808 PDF properties are also used in this document.
35809 When you look in its document settings,
35810 you can see that some additional
35815 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
35816 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
35826 \begin_layout Section
35827 كود تيك وتراكيب لتيك
35828 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35830 name "sec:TeX-Code-1"
35837 \begin_layout Subsection
35839 \begin_inset Index idx
35844 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35851 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35853 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
35860 \begin_layout Standard
35863 As \SpecialChar LyX
35864 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
35866 it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
35867 commands and constructs,
35870 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
35871 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
35872 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
35873 -package for every problem,
35874 though \SpecialChar LyX
35875 cannot support all packages and their commands.
35878 \begin_layout Standard
35882 you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
35883 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
35884 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
35887 Code box is created by the menu
35889 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35891 \begin_inset space ~
35896 or by the toolbar button
35917 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on it and selecting
35924 \begin_layout Standard
35927 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
35929 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
35932 if you want to draw a frame around a word
35936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35939 The LyX way would be to use a framed box.
35944 and are therefore using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
35952 you can write the command part
35958 in a \SpecialChar TeX
35959 Code box before the word and the closing brace
35963 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
35964 Code box behind the word.
35965 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
35966 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the following example:
35969 \begin_layout Standard
35970 \begin_inset Graphics
35971 filename ../clipart/ERT.png
35979 \begin_layout Standard
35985 \begin_layout Standard
35990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36013 \begin_layout Standard
36016 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
36019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36026 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
36027 -commands without parameters,
36028 you have to insert a space to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
36029 know that the command is finished.
36037 \begin_layout Subsection
36038 مدخل قصير لتراكيب لتيك
36039 \begin_inset Argument 1
36042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36049 \begin_inset Index idx
36054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36061 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36063 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
36070 \begin_layout Standard
36073 When you write larger documents or books,
36074 you will need to know something about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36075 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
36076 uses in the background.
36077 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
36078 is based on commands,
36080 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36084 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36088 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at any time if you know the right commands.
36090 imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline is the end of the day.
36091 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have all caption labels bold.
36092 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels in your manual.
36093 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one day.
36096 \begin_layout Standard
36099 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
36101 As mentioned above,
36102 for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
36104 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36107 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36117 \begin_layout Standard
36120 As result you find that the package
36127 \begin_inset Index idx
36132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36143 you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
36145 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36148 \SpecialChar menuseparator
36152 \begin_inset space ~
36160 \begin_layout Standard
36166 usepackage[options]{package name}
36169 \begin_layout Standard
36172 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
36173 commands begin with a backslash,
36174 the command argument is set within two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
36175 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
36178 \begin_layout Standard
36181 In your case the package name is
36186 After a look in the documentation of the package,
36187 you know that the option
36191 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
36192 So you add the command
36195 \begin_layout Standard
36201 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
36204 \begin_layout Standard
36207 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
36211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36214 For more commands provided by the
36219 have a look at its documentation,
36221 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36236 \begin_layout Standard
36239 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems like your case.
36240 For example if you use a
36245 you don't need the package
36250 you can instead write
36253 \begin_layout Standard
36259 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
36264 \begin_layout Standard
36267 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
36268 So if you plan to write a large document,
36269 you should have a look at the documentation of the document class you want to use.
36276 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
36279 \begin_layout Standard
36282 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document,
36283 while commands in the text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command argument.
36284 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
36286 use the \SpecialChar TeX
36287 Code box as described in the previous section.
36290 \begin_layout Standard
36293 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
36295 have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36297 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36299 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
36307 \begin_layout Standard
36310 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
36316 \begin_layout Standard
36320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36332 \begin_inset Note Note
36335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36338 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
36346 \begin_layout Left Header
36347 \begin_inset Argument 1
36350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36372 \begin_inset Note Note
36375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36378 defines the header line as described below
36386 \begin_layout Center Header
36387 \begin_inset Argument 1
36390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36399 \begin_layout Right Header
36400 \begin_inset Argument 1
36403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36426 \begin_layout Left Footer
36427 \begin_inset Argument 1
36430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36453 \begin_layout Center Footer
36454 \begin_inset Argument 1
36457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36472 \begin_inset Newline newline
36478 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
36484 \begin_layout Right Footer
36485 \begin_inset Argument 1
36488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36510 \begin_layout Section
36511 تخصيص رأس وتذييل الصفحات
36512 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36514 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
36519 \begin_inset Index idx
36524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36532 \begin_inset Index idx
36537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36546 \begin_layout Standard
36549 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document,
36550 you need to set the
36553 \begin_inset space ~
36564 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36570 \begin_inset space ~
36576 As a second step add in the menu
36578 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36579 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36583 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36588 Custom Header/Footerlines
36591 \begin_inset Quotes erd
36595 This module offers the following 6
36596 \begin_inset space ~
36602 \begin_layout Description
36606 \begin_inset space ~
36610 \begin_inset space ~
36614 \begin_inset space ~
36618 \begin_inset space ~
36622 \begin_inset space ~
36628 \begin_layout Description
36632 \begin_inset space ~
36636 \begin_inset space ~
36640 \begin_inset space ~
36644 \begin_inset space ~
36648 \begin_inset space ~
36654 \begin_layout Standard
36657 for the different positions in the header/footer.
36658 These environments can be selected in the environment pull-down box.
36661 \begin_layout Standard
36665 headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
36666 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
36668 \begin_inset space ~
36672 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36674 reference "fig:Page-layout"
36679 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
36682 \begin_layout Standard
36683 \begin_inset Float figure
36690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36693 \begin_inset Tabular
36694 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
36695 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
36696 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
36697 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
36698 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
36700 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36709 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
36712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36718 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
36721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36729 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36733 \begin_inset space ~
36741 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36745 \begin_inset space ~
36753 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
36756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36757 \begin_inset space ~
36767 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
36770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36771 The normal text on the page goes here.
36772 The running header is above the text,
36773 and the footer is below (including footnotes).
36774 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number,
36775 title of the chapter,
36776 company logo but you can use almost anything,
36782 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36791 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
36794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36802 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36806 \begin_inset space ~
36814 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36818 \begin_inset space ~
36826 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
36829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36830 \begin_inset space ~
36840 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
36843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36849 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
36852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36858 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
36861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36876 \begin_inset Caption Standard
36878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36879 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36881 name "fig:Page-layout"
36885 نسق الصفحة مع تخصيص الرأس والتذييل.
36898 \begin_layout Standard
36901 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
36904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36911 some document classes implement their own customized page headers and footers if
36914 \begin_inset space ~
36919 is set to “Default”.
36920 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers and footers.
36928 \begin_layout Subsection
36932 \begin_layout Standard
36935 To define your header line,
36936 add all three header environments.
36937 The things you add to each environment appear on odd numbered pages,
36938 the things in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
36939 For single-sided documents,
36940 the optional arguments will not be used and can be omitted.
36941 If you leave a header environment or its argument empty,
36942 nothing appears in the output.
36943 Defining the footer line works similarly.
36946 \begin_layout Standard
36949 For the definition,
36950 you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
36951 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
36954 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
36956 \begin_inset space ~
36964 \begin_layout Description
36967 thepage طباعة رقم الصفحة الحالية
36970 \begin_layout Description
36973 Roman{page} طبعة رقم الصفحة الحالية على شكل أرقام رومانية كبيرة
36976 \begin_layout Description
36979 roman{page} طبعة رقم الصفحة الحالية على شكل أرقام رومانية صغيرة
36982 \begin_layout Description
36987 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
36988 If the document has chapters,
36989 it prints the current chapter number and title instead.
36991 \begin_inset Quotes eld
36995 \begin_inset Quotes prd
36998 because it usually goes in a left header.
37001 \begin_layout Description
37006 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
37007 If the document has chapters,
37008 it prints the current section number and title instead.
37009 It is normally used in the right header.
37012 \begin_layout Subsection
37013 الرأس/التذييل الافتراضي
37016 \begin_layout Standard
37019 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
37020 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center footer has the page number.
37021 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer,
37022 include the relevant header/footer style in your document,
37023 but leave it blank.
37025 if you do not want a page number in the footer,
37029 \begin_inset space ~
37037 \begin_layout Subsection
37041 \begin_layout Standard
37044 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
37045 Some pages are different.
37046 The title page has a header/footer environment of its own,
37047 and so does any page that starts a new part or chapter in your book.
37048 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers,
37049 but that is normal.
37050 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
37053 \begin_layout Subsubsection
37054 خط الزخرفة في الرأس والتذييل
37057 \begin_layout Standard
37062 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37065 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
37066 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
37078 in the following way:
37081 \begin_layout Standard
37089 headrulewidth}{thickness}
37092 \begin_layout Standard
37095 where thickness is a size in standard units like
37108 If you don't want a line,
37109 set the thickness to 0
37110 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37116 \begin_layout Standard
37119 The lines can also be colored,
37120 but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
37122 If you really need this,
37123 have a look at the Internet or in section
37124 \begin_inset space ~
37128 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
37138 \begin_layout Subsubsection
37139 عدة أسطر في الرأس والتذييل
37142 \begin_layout Standard
37145 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer,
37146 you can do this by adding a ragged line break in the style definition.
37148 the default height of the header/footer is only the height of one text line.
37149 To expand the height,
37150 redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37165 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37166 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37168 \begin_inset space ~
37176 \begin_layout Standard
37184 headheight}{height}
37187 \begin_layout Standard
37194 is a size in standard units (e.
37195 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37199 \begin_inset space \space{}
37207 If you don't know how much space is needed for the height,
37208 define your header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
37209 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37210 logfile with the menu
37212 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37214 \begin_inset space ~
37222 \begin_inset space ~
37227 to see if you can find a warning about the package
37234 \begin_inset Index idx
37239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37249 If there is such a warning,
37250 it contains the space that you need at least for your header/footer.
37253 \begin_layout Subsection
37257 \begin_layout Standard
37260 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
37261 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
37262 This example consists of the following definition:
37265 \begin_layout Description
37269 \begin_inset space ~
37279 empty optional argument
37282 \begin_layout Description
37286 \begin_inset space ~
37290 empty optional argument
37293 \begin_layout Description
37297 \begin_inset space ~
37307 in the optional argument
37310 \begin_layout Description
37314 \begin_inset space ~
37324 in the optional argument
37327 \begin_layout Description
37331 \begin_inset space ~
37345 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37349 \begin_inset Newline newline
37353 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
37357 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37360 in the optional argument
37363 \begin_layout Description
37367 \begin_inset space ~
37377 empty optional argument
37380 \begin_layout Description
37385 headrulewidth set to 2
37386 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37392 \begin_layout Standard
37395 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers,
37397 For more specialized features,
37400 see the manual of the
37406 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
37416 \begin_layout Standard
37419 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
37425 \begin_layout Standard
37431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37435 pagestyle{headings}
37441 \begin_inset Note Note
37444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37447 switches back to page style with the default headings
37455 \begin_layout Section
37456 استعراض مقتطفات من مستندك
37457 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37459 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
37464 \begin_inset Index idx
37469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37476 \begin_inset Index idx
37481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37491 \begin_layout Standard
37495 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly so you can see how they will look in the final document without having to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
37498 \begin_layout Subsection
37502 \begin_layout Standard
37505 To get previews working,
37506 you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37514 \begin_inset Index idx
37519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37528 (on some systems named simply
37533 If it is not already installed,
37534 you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
37537 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
37544 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
37546 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
37555 for \SpecialChar LyX
37556 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37557 -package are automatically installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
37561 \begin_layout Subsection
37565 \begin_layout Standard
37568 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
37569 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
37571 activate the option
37574 \begin_inset space ~
37581 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
37587 \begin_inset space ~
37591 \begin_inset space ~
37594 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
37601 \begin_inset space ~
37614 \begin_inset space ~
37619 is the multiplication factor for the size.
37622 \begin_layout Standard
37625 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
37630 \begin_inset space ~
37638 \begin_inset space ~
37646 \begin_layout Standard
37649 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
37650 and when you finish editing an inset.
37653 \begin_layout Standard
37656 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
37659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37666 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately generated by activating the option
37669 \begin_inset space ~
37675 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
37683 \begin_layout Subsection
37684 تحديد أجزاء المستند
37687 \begin_layout Standard
37690 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
37691 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
37692 cannot render like rotated parts or things that are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
37695 insert a preview inset via the menu
37697 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
37701 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
37702 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
37703 If you click on the preview,
37704 you can edit the previewed stuff.
37707 \begin_layout Standard
37711 To create rotated boxes,
37712 you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37719 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
37724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37732 is explained in section
37734 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
37739 \begin_inset space ~
37749 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
37750 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
37751 the final rotated boxes,
37752 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
37753 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated boxes into it.
37754 Here is the result:
37757 \begin_layout Standard
37760 \begin_inset Preview
37762 \begin_layout Standard
37767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37771 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
37777 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
37787 height_special "totalheight"
37792 backgroundcolor "none"
37795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37820 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
37826 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
37833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37848 \begin_layout Standard
37851 Previewing works also for colors.
37852 In this example a special framed,
37853 colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37864 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37872 is explained in section
37879 \begin_inset space ~
37892 \begin_layout Standard
37895 \begin_inset Preview
37897 \begin_layout Standard
37901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37920 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
37929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37944 \begin_layout Standard
37947 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
37953 \begin_layout Standard
37956 If \SpecialChar LyX
37957 does not show a preview,
37958 make sure that you enabled previews as described above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
37959 Code in the preview inset is valid and that you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37960 packages in your document preamble that are required by the \SpecialChar TeX
37962 If \SpecialChar LyX
37963 cannot create a preview,
37964 you will in most cases also not be able to view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
37966 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
37967 Code and don't know if it is correct,
37968 the preview inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
37971 \begin_layout Subsection
37972 كود \SpecialChar LaTeX
37976 \begin_layout Standard
37979 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37980 source of the whole document or parts of it.
37983 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
37985 \begin_inset space ~
37990 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37992 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor currently sits.
37993 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
37995 then only this selection (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
37996 To view the whole document as source,
37997 enable the corresponding option in the source view window.
38003 you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
38005 but note that if you have several documents open,
38006 this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
38008 not just the one which is open at the time.
38011 \begin_layout Section
38012 البحث والاستبدال المتقدم
38013 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38015 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
38020 \begin_inset Index idx
38025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38032 \begin_inset Index idx
38037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38046 \begin_layout Subsection
38050 \begin_layout Standard
38053 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
38054 allows for searching of complex,
38055 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
38057 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
38058 The key-features are:
38061 \begin_layout Itemize
38064 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed,
38065 where the latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way;
38066 not only entire mathematical formulas are found,
38067 but also parts occurring within more complex formulas
38070 \begin_layout Itemize
38073 Search may be format-insensitive,
38074 so that the searched text is found in any context/style (standard text,
38077 and even mathematics),
38078 or it may be format-sensitive,
38081 a word entered with a section heading will only be found within section headings
38084 \begin_layout Itemize
38087 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only;
38088 this is useful for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text outside of mathematics environments
38091 \begin_layout Itemize
38094 Search may be widened to a specific
38100 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38104 \begin_inset space ~
38107 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
38108 all the open files,
38109 or all the manuals available from the
38116 \begin_layout Itemize
38119 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization,
38120 so that the replaced text capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
38121 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38125 \begin_inset space ~
38130 first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
38133 \begin_layout Subsection
38137 \begin_layout Standard
38140 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
38142 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
38157 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
38162 ) or the toolbar button
38167 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
38175 Advanced Find and Replace
38180 \begin_layout Subsubsection
38184 \begin_layout Standard
38192 mini-editor a simple word,
38193 and search for occurrences of it by clicking on the
38196 \begin_inset space ~
38201 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
38206 arg "paragraph-break"
38212 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode,
38214 bold or normal face,
38215 and in both in section titles and in standard text.
38221 arg "paragraph-break"
38226 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
38230 searches backwards.
38233 \begin_layout Standard
38239 \begin_inset space ~
38244 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
38252 \begin_inset space ~
38257 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
38260 \begin_layout Subsubsection
38264 \begin_layout Standard
38267 Mathematical formulas,
38269 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
38272 or something more complex like
38273 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
38277 may be searched for by typing them in the
38282 When searching for a formula,
38283 it is found both when it is alone and when it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
38284 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
38285 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}$
38291 \begin_layout Subsubsection
38295 \begin_layout Standard
38298 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
38299 This is done by switching to the
38303 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
38316 \begin_layout Itemize
38319 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word occurring in emphasized or boldface.
38322 \begin_layout Itemize
38325 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective instances with the same face only,
38326 and within the same text style only.
38329 \begin_layout Itemize
38332 a normal word in a section heading,
38333 and searching for it,
38334 would find occurrences of it only within section headings.
38336 if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face,
38337 in addition to a section style,
38338 then it is found only when occurring with the same style.
38341 \begin_layout Itemize
38344 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
38347 \begin_layout Subsubsection
38351 \begin_layout Standard
38354 The entries made in the
38358 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
38361 \begin_inset space ~
38367 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it,
38372 button or alternatively press
38377 arg "paragraph-break"
38386 while the cursor is in the
38389 \begin_inset space ~
38397 \begin_layout Standard
38400 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
38402 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention two):
38405 \begin_layout Itemize
38408 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the same word,
38409 for example replacing occurrences of a name like
38410 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38414 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38417 with its typewriter version
38418 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38426 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38432 \begin_layout Itemize
38435 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols,
38436 for example replacing occurrences of
38437 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38441 \begin_inset Formula $R$
38445 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38449 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38453 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
38457 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38460 (you may want to enable the
38463 \begin_inset space ~
38471 \begin_inset space ~
38476 options and disable the
38485 in order to avoid replacing all
38486 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38490 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38493 letters occurring in normal text),
38495 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
38499 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
38504 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
38508 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
38514 \begin_layout Subsection
38518 \begin_layout Standard
38521 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
38525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38528 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
38530 \begin_inset CommandInset href
38532 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
38542 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into the
38547 This is done with the context menu
38549 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
38550 Insert Regular Expression
38552 while the cursor is in the
38557 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular expression matching rules
38561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38564 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
38567 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38571 \begin_inset space ~
38574 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
38576 no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to match expressions.
38582 while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the same text in the document.
38583 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
38584 Examples of using such a feature may be:
38587 \begin_layout Enumerate
38590 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator:
38596 editor the fraction
38597 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
38601 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
38604 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all fractions with the given denominator.
38607 \begin_layout Enumerate
38610 Searching for all text with a given style:
38612 after unchecking the
38624 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
38629 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face,
38630 finds all emphasized or bold face text respectively.
38633 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
38636 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
38637 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
38640 \begin_layout Standard
38644 references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
38645 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
38646 \begin_inset Formula $()$
38650 and referring back to them through
38651 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
38656 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
38662 try searching with the regexp
38663 \begin_inset Newline newline
38666 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
38669 \begin_inset Newline newline
38672 in order to find word repetitions,
38676 \begin_layout Standard
38679 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
38682 \begin_layout Standard
38685 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
38688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38695 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp,
38696 and when occurring in multiple different regexps,
38697 where the numbering of back-referenced sub-expressions is absolute.
38699 \begin_inset space ~
38703 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
38706 always refers to the first occurrence of
38707 \begin_inset Formula $()$
38710 in all entered regexps.
38718 \begin_layout Section
38720 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38722 name "sec:Spellchecking"
38727 \begin_inset Index idx
38732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38741 \begin_layout Standard
38745 has a built-in spell checker.
38748 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38756 key or the toolbar button
38761 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
38766 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the beginning of the currently selected text.
38767 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found,
38768 allowing you to edit and replace it in a second line.
38769 Whenever an unknown word is found,
38770 the word is highlighted and the text scrolled so that it is visible.
38771 In the spellchecker sidebar,
38772 there is a box showing suggestions for a correction,
38773 if any could be found.
38774 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
38779 double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
38780 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
38783 \begin_layout Standard
38787 the dictionary file used is determined by the document language that is set in the
38789 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38793 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing a different one at the top of the dialog.
38795 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
38796 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
38799 \begin_inset space ~
38809 arg "dialog-show character"
38814 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
38816 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
38819 \begin_layout Standard
38822 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
38823 can be downloaded from here:
38824 \begin_inset Newline newline
38828 \begin_inset Flex URL
38831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38833 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
38839 \begin_inset Newline newline
38843 \begin_inset space ~
38846 files for each language.
38847 To install a dictionary on Windows,
38849 \begin_inset space ~
38852 files into \SpecialChar LyX
38853 's installation subfolder
38861 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
38863 \begin_inset Newline newline
38866 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
38867 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
38868 but in most cases these are
38888 is the language code.
38891 \begin_layout Subsection
38892 المزيد من الإعدادات
38895 \begin_layout Standard
38900 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
38901 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
38903 \begin_inset space ~
38906 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38909 you can set the following things:
38912 \begin_layout Description
38916 \begin_inset space ~
38919 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
38920 should use for spell checking.
38921 Depending on your platform,
38932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38935 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
38936 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
38951 \begin_inset space ~
38954 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
38957 \begin_layout Description
38961 \begin_inset space ~
38964 language If this field is not empty,
38966 will always use the given language for the spell checking,
38967 no matter what the document language is.
38970 \begin_layout Description
38974 \begin_inset space ~
38977 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker should escape,
38979 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38983 \begin_inset space \space{}
38987 This should normally not be needed.
38990 \begin_layout Description
38994 \begin_inset space ~
38998 \begin_inset space ~
39001 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words like
39002 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39006 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39012 \begin_layout Description
39016 \begin_inset space ~
39019 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
39020 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
39021 By right-clicking on an underlined word,
39022 suggestions from the spellchecker appear in a context menu.
39023 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested word.
39026 \begin_layout Description
39030 \begin_inset space ~
39034 \begin_inset space ~
39038 \begin_inset space ~
39041 comments If enabled,
39042 the spelling of non-printed document content is checked as well.
39045 \begin_layout Section
39047 \begin_inset Index idx
39052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39059 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39061 name "sec:Thesaurus"
39068 \begin_layout Standard
39072 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
39073 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice,
39074 OpenOffice and Firefox (namely the
39082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39085 \begin_inset CommandInset href
39087 target "https://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
39098 which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
39102 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
39103 which are available for many languages.
39106 \begin_layout Standard
39109 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for the use with \SpecialChar LyX
39113 \begin_layout Subsection
39117 \begin_layout Standard
39128 thesauri consist of two files per language:
39129 A file with the suffix
39133 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
39138 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language (e.
39139 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39143 \begin_inset space ~
39152 the US English files are named:
39155 \begin_layout Itemize
39161 \begin_layout Itemize
39167 \begin_layout Standard
39178 and its thesaurus installed,
39179 these files should be already on your system and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
39182 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39183 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
39184 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
39186 \begin_inset space ~
39191 ) to the path where they are installed.
39195 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39199 depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionaries,
39200 typical locations are
39207 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
39212 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
39217 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
39221 dictionaries are to be found at
39227 LibreOffice-<Version>
39235 the default location is
39237 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
39238 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
39239 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
39240 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
39241 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
39242 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
39251 you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation during the \SpecialChar LyX
39252 installation process,
39253 which will then be installed in the correct place right away.
39256 \begin_layout Standard
39259 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
39260 further thesaurus dictionaries,
39261 you can downloaded them from here:
39262 \begin_inset Newline newline
39266 \begin_inset Flex URL
39269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39271 https://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/thesaurus/
39279 \begin_layout Standard
39282 To install a new dictionary,
39283 download the two files for this dictionary into the thesaurus path (which is set in
39285 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39286 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
39287 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
39289 \begin_inset space ~
39294 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
39296 If this path is not defined yet,
39297 you can use a dictionary of your choice and point \SpecialChar LyX
39301 \begin_layout Standard
39305 you can also install new dictionaries via
39307 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
39312 via your package manager (look for
39318 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
39322 make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
39323 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
39325 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39331 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39332 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
39333 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
39335 \begin_inset space ~
39340 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
39343 \begin_layout Subsection
39347 \begin_layout Standard
39350 To start the thesaurus,
39353 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39356 or the toolbar button
39361 arg "thesaurus-entry"
39366 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is selected.
39367 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as a replacement.
39368 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
39370 for some languages (such as English),
39371 the thesaurus does not only show equivalent words (synonyms),
39372 but also generic terms (such as
39381 related terms (such as
39384 \begin_inset space ~
39397 \begin_inset space ~
39407 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
39417 related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
39420 \begin_layout Standard
39423 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor,
39424 but you can also switch it in the dialog,
39425 as you can enter new words to look up directly there.
39428 \begin_layout Standard
39431 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in the dictionary,
39437 and you have to use the so called lemma form,
39439 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39443 \begin_inset space \space{}
39446 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages:
39447 first person singular indicative active for nouns,
39448 infinitive for verbs).
39450 looking up the word form
39455 while results are shown for the word form
39460 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
39461 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
39465 \begin_inset space \space{}
39477 then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in the dialog,
39478 and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only the highlighted part will be replaced;
39479 thus the ending remains).
39482 \begin_layout Section
39484 \begin_inset Index idx
39489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39496 \begin_inset Index idx
39501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39509 \begin_inset CommandInset label
39511 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
39518 \begin_layout Standard
39521 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
39522 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
39523 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
39525 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39527 \begin_inset space ~
39530 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
39532 \begin_inset space ~
39540 \begin_layout Standard
39543 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
39558 The color depends on the author that made the change.
39559 You can change the color in
39561 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39562 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
39564 \begin_inset space ~
39568 \begin_inset space ~
39573 \SpecialChar menuseparator
39580 \begin_inset Index idx
39585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39594 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
39595 's status bar when the cursor is in changed text.
39596 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
39601 arg "changes-merge"
39607 \begin_layout Standard
39610 When change tracking is activated,
39611 you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
39615 \begin_inset Index idx
39620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39630 \begin_layout Standard
39631 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39637 \begin_layout Standard
39638 \begin_inset Graphics
39639 filename ../clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
39647 \begin_layout Standard
39648 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39654 \begin_layout Standard
39657 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
39660 \begin_layout Standard
39663 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
39669 \begin_layout Standard
39670 \begin_inset Tabular
39671 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
39672 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
39673 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39674 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
39675 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39676 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39679 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39684 arg "changes-track"
39692 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39699 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39701 \begin_inset space ~
39704 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
39706 \begin_inset space ~
39715 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39716 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39724 arg "changes-output"
39732 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39739 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39741 \begin_inset space ~
39744 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
39746 \begin_inset space ~
39750 \begin_inset space ~
39754 \begin_inset space ~
39763 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39764 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39780 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39786 Jumps to the next change
39792 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39793 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39801 arg "change-accept"
39809 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39816 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39818 \begin_inset space ~
39821 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
39823 \begin_inset space ~
39832 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39833 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39841 arg "change-reject"
39849 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39856 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39858 \begin_inset space ~
39861 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
39863 \begin_inset space ~
39872 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39873 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39881 arg "changes-merge"
39889 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39896 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39898 \begin_inset space ~
39901 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
39903 \begin_inset space ~
39912 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39913 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39921 arg "all-changes-accept"
39929 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39936 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39938 \begin_inset space ~
39941 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
39943 \begin_inset space ~
39947 \begin_inset space ~
39956 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
39957 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39965 arg "all-changes-reject"
39973 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
39976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39980 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39982 \begin_inset space ~
39985 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
39987 \begin_inset space ~
39991 \begin_inset space ~
40000 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40001 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40017 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40024 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
40025 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
40027 \begin_inset space ~
40036 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40037 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40053 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40060 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
40062 \begin_inset space ~
40078 \begin_layout Standard
40081 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
40087 \begin_layout Standard
40090 Not all changes are (yet) visualized,
40091 especially no format changes like from
40110 \begin_layout Standard
40113 The review toolbar helps you to accept,
40115 or merge changes – highlight the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
40116 When you merge changes,
40117 a window pops up showing you information about the next change after the current cursor position.
40118 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
40119 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and step to the next change.
40120 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
40123 \begin_layout Standard
40126 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important to describe a change.
40129 \begin_layout Standard
40132 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40140 \begin_inset Index idx
40145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40155 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
40158 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
40165 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40169 \begin_layout Section
40171 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40173 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
40178 \begin_inset Index idx
40183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40192 \begin_layout Standard
40195 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
40198 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40202 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
40203 file with change tracking enabled showing the differences.
40204 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
40205 should take the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
40208 \begin_inset space ~
40212 \begin_inset space ~
40216 \begin_inset space ~
40225 \begin_inset space ~
40229 \begin_inset space ~
40233 \begin_inset space ~
40237 \begin_inset space ~
40241 \begin_inset space ~
40245 \begin_inset space ~
40250 enables the change tracking option
40253 \begin_inset space ~
40257 \begin_inset space ~
40261 \begin_inset space ~
40266 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
40269 \begin_layout Section
40271 \begin_inset Index idx
40276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40285 \begin_layout Standard
40288 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
40289 with any language you want.
40290 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
40293 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
40295 key "Arabic,Armenian,Cyrillic,Farsi,Hebrew,Japanese"
40303 \begin_layout Standard
40308 also supports phonetic symbols,
40310 \begin_inset space ~
40314 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40316 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
40324 \begin_layout Subsection
40326 \begin_inset Index idx
40331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40339 \begin_inset Index idx
40344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40352 \begin_inset Index idx
40357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40367 \begin_layout Standard
40372 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40373 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40376 dialog lets you set
40379 the quote style and character encoding
40384 \begin_layout Standard
40391 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
40396 \begin_inset space ~
40401 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
40402 For details about the different encoding options see section
40403 \begin_inset space ~
40407 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40409 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
40417 \begin_layout Subsection
40418 ضبط خريطة لوحة المفاتيح
40419 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40421 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
40428 \begin_layout Standard
40431 If you have for example a U.
40432 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40435 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English,
40436 you can use an alternate keymap.
40438 if you want to write in Italian,
40439 you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
40440 to use an Italian keymap.
40443 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40444 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40445 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
40448 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings,
40450 \begin_inset space ~
40454 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40456 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
40462 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select which one you want to use.
40465 \begin_layout Standard
40469 you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely different keymap (for Vulcan,
40473 normally write in Italian on a U.
40474 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
40477 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
40479 you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing one to support the characters you want.
40480 This and many other customizations are explained in the
40487 \begin_layout Chapter
40490 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40492 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
40499 \begin_layout Standard
40502 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
40503 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special topic inside the user's guide.
40506 \begin_layout Section
40508 \begin_inset Index idx
40513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40523 \begin_layout Standard
40530 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
40533 \begin_layout Subsection
40537 \begin_layout Standard
40540 Creates a new document.
40543 \begin_layout Subsection
40547 \begin_layout Standard
40550 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
40551 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for the document,
40552 features you would otherwise need to change manually.
40555 \begin_layout Subsection
40559 \begin_layout Standard
40565 \begin_layout Subsection
40569 \begin_layout Standard
40572 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
40573 Click there on a file to open it.
40576 \begin_layout Subsection
40580 \begin_layout Standard
40583 Closes the current document.
40586 \begin_layout Subsection
40590 \begin_layout Standard
40593 Closes all opened documents.
40596 \begin_layout Subsection
40600 \begin_layout Standard
40603 Saves the actual document.
40606 \begin_layout Subsection
40610 \begin_layout Standard
40613 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
40616 \begin_layout Subsection
40620 \begin_layout Standard
40623 Saves all opened documents.
40626 \begin_layout Subsection
40630 \begin_layout Standard
40633 Reloads the actual document from disk.
40636 \begin_layout Subsection
40640 \begin_layout Standard
40643 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
40644 It is described in the section
40646 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
40651 Additional Features
40656 \begin_layout Subsection
40660 \begin_layout Standard
40663 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
40669 plain text files and comma separated,
40670 table-like text files (CSV).
40671 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
40675 \begin_layout Standard
40678 When using the menu entry
40681 \begin_inset space ~
40687 line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph;
40688 when using the menu entry
40691 \begin_inset space ~
40695 \begin_inset space ~
40699 \begin_inset space ~
40705 consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
40706 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
40709 \begin_layout Subsection
40711 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40713 name "subsec:Export"
40720 \begin_layout Standard
40723 You can export your document to various file formats.
40724 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
40726 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
40727 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
40728 during its configuration.
40731 \begin_layout Standard
40734 Here is a list of all available entries;
40735 some of them are explained in detail in section
40736 \begin_inset space ~
40740 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40742 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
40750 \begin_layout Description
40757 \begin_inset space ~
40760 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
40762 \begin_inset space ~
40765 1.4.x versions for Chinese,
40766 Japanese and Korean (CJK)
40767 \begin_inset Newline newline
40770 Since \SpecialChar LyX
40771 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
40775 \begin_layout Description
40778 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup language
40783 \begin_layout Description
40787 \begin_inset space ~
40790 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup language
40795 \begin_layout Description
40798 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
40799 's native DVI-format.
40800 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in files paths or file names in your document.
40802 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
40809 \begin_layout Description
40812 DVI DVI-format that also allows the useage of special characters or spaces in files paths or file names
40815 \begin_layout Description
40819 \begin_inset space ~
40826 ) DVI-format using the program
40828 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
40832 supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
40837 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
40840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40847 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
40855 \begin_layout Description
40859 \begin_inset space ~
40862 (cropped) the same as
40866 but with cropped page margins.
40869 \begin_layout Description
40873 \begin_inset space ~
40876 Dot text file with code in the programming language
40880 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
40885 \begin_layout Description
40892 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
40895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40902 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
40910 \begin_layout Description
40914 \begin_inset space ~
40918 \begin_inset space ~
40921 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
40926 as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and not in the format
40933 \begin_layout Description
40938 \begin_inset space ~
40947 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40948 source that is compilable with the program
40950 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
40954 \begin_layout Description
40959 \begin_inset space ~
40964 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40966 additionally all images used in the document will be converted to a format that is readable by the
40976 \begin_layout Description
40981 \begin_inset space ~
40986 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40988 additionally all images used in the document will be converted to the EPS-format,
40989 only this format is readable by the
40996 \begin_layout Description
41001 \begin_inset space ~
41010 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41011 source that is compilable with the program
41017 \begin_layout Description
41021 \begin_inset space ~
41025 \begin_inset space ~
41032 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41033 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation software
41038 \begin_layout Description
41042 \begin_inset space ~
41045 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
41046 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
41048 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41052 \begin_inset space \space{}
41057 \begin_inset space ~
41062 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41066 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41070 \begin_inset Quotes eld
41074 \begin_inset Quotes erd
41077 represent the version number)
41080 \begin_layout Description
41084 \begin_inset space ~
41088 \begin_inset space ~
41091 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary to compile it (images,
41093 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
41098 \begin_layout Description
41101 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
41102 's internal XHTML engine
41105 \begin_layout Description
41109 \begin_inset space ~
41113 \begin_inset space ~
41117 \begin_inset space ~
41121 \begin_inset space ~
41124 XML Office Open XML file,
41130 For the conversion the program
41139 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
41142 \begin_layout Description
41145 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
41150 \begin_layout Description
41154 \begin_inset space ~
41157 (Pandoc) OpenDocument file,
41167 For the conversion the program
41176 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
41179 \begin_layout Description
41183 \begin_inset space ~
41186 (tex4ht) OpenDocument file.
41187 For the conversion the program
41196 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
41199 \begin_layout Description
41203 \begin_inset space ~
41206 (cropped) the same as
41209 \begin_inset space ~
41214 but with cropped page margins
41217 \begin_layout Description
41222 \begin_inset space ~
41227 PDF-format using the program
41232 produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
41235 \begin_layout Description
41240 \begin_inset space ~
41244 \begin_inset space ~
41252 \begin_inset space ~
41257 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
41258 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41262 \begin_inset space \space{}
41265 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermediate preview)
41268 \begin_layout Description
41273 \begin_inset space ~
41278 PDF-format using the program
41280 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
41284 produces PDF-files directly
41287 \begin_layout Description
41292 \begin_inset space ~
41297 PDF-format using the program
41302 produces PDF-files directly
41305 \begin_layout Description
41310 \begin_inset space ~
41315 PDF-format using the program
41320 produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
41323 \begin_layout Description
41328 \begin_inset space ~
41333 PDF-format using the program
41339 produces PDF-files directly
41342 \begin_layout Description
41347 \begin_inset space ~
41355 \begin_layout Description
41360 \begin_inset space ~
41364 \begin_inset space ~
41370 the document will first be converted to Postscript format and then exported as text using the program
41375 \begin_layout Description
41381 PostScript format using the program
41390 options see section
41391 \begin_inset space ~
41395 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41397 reference "subsec:General-output"
41405 \begin_layout Description
41408 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
41409 source and also code in the statistical programming language
41422 it is possible to use
41426 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
41430 \begin_layout Standard
41433 If one of the menu entries
41441 \begin_inset space ~
41451 you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
41453 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
41458 \begin_inset space ~
41462 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41464 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
41470 \begin_inset Index idx
41475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41484 \begin_layout Subsection
41488 \begin_layout Standard
41491 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
41494 \begin_inset space ~
41498 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41500 reference "sec:Paths"
41506 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
41515 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
41516 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
41517 's preferences as described in section
41518 \begin_inset space ~
41522 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41524 reference "subsec:Converters"
41532 \begin_layout Subsection
41536 \begin_layout Standard
41539 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
41543 \begin_layout Subsection
41547 \begin_layout Standard
41550 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
41553 \begin_layout Section
41555 \begin_inset Index idx
41560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41570 \begin_layout Subsection
41574 \begin_layout Standard
41577 Described in section
41578 \begin_inset space ~
41582 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41584 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
41592 \begin_layout Subsection
41600 \begin_layout Standard
41603 Described in section
41604 \begin_inset space ~
41608 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41610 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
41618 \begin_layout Subsection
41622 \begin_layout Standard
41625 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
41626 If the cursor is outside an inset,
41627 the whole document will be selected.
41630 \begin_layout Subsection
41634 \begin_layout Standard
41637 Selects the whole document.
41640 \begin_layout Subsection
41641 بحث & استبدال (سريع)
41644 \begin_layout Standard
41647 Described in section
41648 \begin_inset space ~
41652 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41654 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
41662 \begin_layout Subsection
41663 بحث & استبدال (متقدم)
41666 \begin_layout Standard
41669 Described in section
41670 \begin_inset space ~
41674 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41676 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
41684 \begin_layout Subsection
41685 نقل الفقرة للأعلى/الأسفل
41688 \begin_layout Standard
41691 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph up or down.
41694 \begin_layout Subsection
41698 \begin_layout Standard
41701 Described in section
41702 \begin_inset space ~
41706 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41708 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
41716 \begin_layout Subsection
41718 \begin_inset Index idx
41723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41733 \begin_layout Standard
41736 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment,
41737 line spacing and label width.
41738 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently in.
41741 \begin_layout Standard
41744 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you have chosen to separate paragraphs with
41750 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
41751 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
41753 \begin_inset space ~
41761 \begin_layout Subsection
41762 الجدول و الصفوف & الأعمدة
41765 \begin_layout Standard
41768 These menus only appear if the cursor is inside a table.
41769 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells,
41770 add or remove borders of a cell and to set the alignment of the cell.
41773 \begin_layout Subsection
41777 \begin_layout Standard
41780 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside an inset.
41781 It will dissolve this inset.
41782 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal text.
41785 \begin_layout Subsection
41789 \begin_layout Standard
41792 This menu is only active if the cursor is inside an inset or a formula.
41793 Here you can change the properties of the inset or the formula.
41796 \begin_layout Subsection
41797 زيادة/إنقاص عمق القائمة
41800 \begin_layout Standard
41803 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can be nested.
41804 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
41805 \begin_inset space ~
41809 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41811 reference "sec:Nesting"
41817 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41819 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
41827 \begin_layout Section
41829 \begin_inset Index idx
41834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41844 \begin_layout Standard
41847 At the bottom of the
41851 menu the opened documents are listed.
41854 \begin_layout Subsection
41855 فتح/إغلاق كل المدرجات
41858 \begin_layout Standard
41861 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
41864 \begin_layout Subsection
41865 طي/عدم طي ماكرو الرياضيات
41868 \begin_layout Standard
41871 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
41874 \begin_layout Standard
41877 Math macros are described in the
41884 \begin_layout Subsection
41888 \begin_layout Standard
41891 Shows the outline window as described in sections
41892 \begin_inset space ~
41896 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41898 reference "sec:Navigating"
41904 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41906 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
41914 \begin_layout Subsection
41915 نافذة الكود المصدري
41918 \begin_layout Standard
41921 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document,
41922 as described in section
41923 \begin_inset space ~
41927 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
41929 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
41937 \begin_layout Subsection
41941 \begin_layout Standard
41944 Opens a window showing console messages.
41945 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
41947 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41951 hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background while \SpecialChar LaTeX
41952 is processing the document.
41955 \begin_layout Subsection
41957 \begin_inset CommandInset label
41959 name "subsec:Toolbars"
41964 \begin_inset Index idx
41969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41978 \begin_layout Standard
41981 In this menu entry you can set the icon size and the appearance of the different toolbars.
41982 All toolbars and the
41985 \begin_inset space ~
41990 can be turned on and off.
41995 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
42009 \begin_inset space ~
42022 \begin_inset space ~
42027 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
42032 denoted in the menu with the suffix
42039 \begin_layout Standard
42046 state the toolbar is permanently shown;
42051 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment or when a certain feature is enabled.
42052 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking is activated,
42053 the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor is inside a formula or table respectively.
42056 \begin_layout Standard
42060 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
42061 \begin_inset space ~
42065 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42067 reference "sec:Toolbars"
42075 \begin_layout Subsection
42079 \begin_layout Standard
42084 \begin_inset space ~
42088 \begin_inset space ~
42092 \begin_inset space ~
42096 \begin_inset space ~
42100 \begin_inset space ~
42104 \begin_inset space ~
42109 will split \SpecialChar LyX
42110 's main window vertically while
42113 \begin_inset space ~
42117 \begin_inset space ~
42121 \begin_inset space ~
42125 \begin_inset space ~
42129 \begin_inset space ~
42133 \begin_inset space ~
42138 will split it horizontally.
42139 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them,
42140 or to view the same document,
42141 but at different positions.
42142 You can even split the main window several times to view,
42144 three or more documents at the same time.
42145 To close a split view,
42149 \begin_inset space ~
42153 \begin_inset space ~
42161 \begin_layout Subsection
42165 \begin_layout Standard
42168 Closes a split view.
42171 \begin_layout Subsection
42175 \begin_layout Standard
42178 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars so that you will see nothing but your text.
42179 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
42180 's main window fullscreen.
42181 To return from fullscreen to the normal view,
42183 or right-click and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
42186 \begin_layout Section
42188 \begin_inset Index idx
42193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42203 \begin_layout Subsection
42207 \begin_layout Standard
42210 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
42211 \begin_inset space ~
42215 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42217 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
42229 \begin_layout Subsection
42231 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42233 name "subsec:Special-Character"
42240 \begin_layout Standard
42243 Here you can insert the following characters:
42246 \begin_layout Description
42253 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
42255 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
42256 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42257 -packages you have installed.
42258 You can get a complete display by checking
42261 \begin_inset space ~
42267 \begin_inset Newline newline
42271 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
42274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42281 Not all characters will be visible in the
42285 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences dialog (see section
42286 \begin_inset space ~
42290 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42292 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
42297 ) can display every character.
42305 \begin_layout Description
42308 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis:
42313 \begin_layout Description
42317 \begin_inset space ~
42321 \begin_inset space ~
42324 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
42325 \begin_inset space ~
42329 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42331 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
42339 \begin_layout Description
42343 \begin_inset space ~
42346 Quote Inserts this quote:
42348 no matter what quote style you selected in the
42350 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42351 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42357 \begin_layout Description
42361 \begin_inset space ~
42364 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
42366 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42367 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42373 \begin_layout Description
42377 \begin_inset space ~
42380 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks:
42381 \SpecialChar nobreakdash
42385 \begin_layout Description
42389 \begin_inset space ~
42392 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur:
42393 \SpecialChar breakableslash
42397 \begin_layout Description
42401 \begin_inset space ~
42404 Space Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when pressing the
42410 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
42416 \begin_layout Description
42420 \begin_inset space ~
42423 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign:
42424 \SpecialChar menuseparator
42428 \begin_layout Description
42432 \begin_inset space ~
42438 \begin_inset Index idx
42443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42450 \begin_inset Index idx
42455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42464 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these symbols.
42465 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42473 \begin_inset Index idx
42478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42488 \begin_inset Newline newline
42491 More information about this feature can be found in the
42497 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
42503 \begin_layout Description
42506 Logos Inserts the logos of the programs \SpecialChar LyX
42511 and \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
42515 \begin_layout Subsection
42519 \begin_layout Standard
42522 Opens a submenu with the following options:
42525 \begin_layout Description
42528 Superscript Inserts a superscript:
42530 \begin_inset script superscript
42532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42544 \begin_layout Description
42547 Subscript Inserts a subscript:
42549 \begin_inset script subscript
42551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42562 \begin_layout Description
42566 \begin_inset space ~
42569 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
42570 \begin_inset space ~
42574 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42576 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
42584 \begin_layout Description
42588 \begin_inset space ~
42591 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
42592 \begin_inset space ~
42596 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42598 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
42606 \begin_layout Description
42610 \begin_inset space ~
42613 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
42614 \begin_inset space ~
42618 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42620 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
42628 \begin_layout Description
42632 \begin_inset space ~
42635 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
42637 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42641 \begin_inset space \space{}
42644 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
42645 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
42652 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42655 To insert a fraction use the command
42660 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
42664 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
42670 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42673 The visible space is hereby the character before the
42680 \begin_layout Description
42684 \begin_inset space ~
42687 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
42688 \begin_inset space ~
42692 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42694 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
42702 \begin_layout Description
42706 \begin_inset space ~
42709 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
42710 \begin_inset space ~
42714 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42716 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
42724 \begin_layout Description
42728 \begin_inset space ~
42731 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
42732 \begin_inset space ~
42736 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42738 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
42746 \begin_layout Description
42749 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
42750 \begin_inset space ~
42754 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42756 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
42764 \begin_layout Description
42768 \begin_inset space ~
42771 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
42772 \begin_inset space ~
42776 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42778 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
42786 \begin_layout Description
42790 \begin_inset space ~
42793 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
42794 \begin_inset space ~
42798 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42800 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
42808 \begin_layout Description
42812 \begin_inset space ~
42816 \begin_inset space ~
42819 Break Inserts a line break point (zero-width space character) that is invisible in the output.
42821 \begin_inset space ~
42825 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42827 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
42835 for a usage example.
42838 \begin_layout Description
42842 \begin_inset space ~
42846 \begin_inset space ~
42849 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
42850 \begin_inset space ~
42854 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42856 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
42864 \begin_layout Description
42868 \begin_inset space ~
42871 Break Inserts a forced line break that right justifies the remaining text as described in section
42872 \begin_inset space ~
42876 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42878 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
42886 \begin_layout Description
42890 \begin_inset space ~
42893 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
42894 \begin_inset space ~
42898 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42900 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
42908 \begin_layout Description
42912 \begin_inset space ~
42915 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page,
42916 as described in section
42917 \begin_inset space ~
42921 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42923 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
42931 \begin_layout Description
42935 \begin_inset space ~
42938 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
42939 \begin_inset space ~
42943 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42945 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
42953 \begin_layout Description
42957 \begin_inset space ~
42961 \begin_inset space ~
42964 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
42965 \begin_inset space ~
42969 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42971 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
42979 \begin_layout Subsection
42980 قائمة/جدول المحتويات
42983 \begin_layout Standard
42986 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
42990 \begin_inset space ~
43014 are described in section
43015 \begin_inset space ~
43019 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43021 reference "sec:toc"
43031 is described in section
43032 \begin_inset space ~
43036 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43038 reference "sec:Index"
43048 is described in section
43049 \begin_inset space ~
43053 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43055 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
43062 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
43065 is described in section
43066 \begin_inset space ~
43070 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43072 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
43080 \begin_layout Subsection
43084 \begin_layout Standard
43088 as described in section
43089 \begin_inset space ~
43093 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43095 reference "sec:Floats"
43100 and in detail the chapter
43107 \begin_inset space ~
43115 \begin_layout Subsection
43119 \begin_layout Standard
43123 described in section
43124 \begin_inset space ~
43128 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43130 reference "sec:Notes"
43138 \begin_layout Subsection
43142 \begin_layout Standard
43145 Inserts a branch inset,
43147 and allowing you to create and insert a new branch.
43148 Branches are described in section
43149 \begin_inset space ~
43153 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43155 reference "sec:Branches"
43163 \begin_layout Subsection
43167 \begin_layout Standard
43170 Inserts document class-specific insets.
43171 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain document class.
43172 An example is the document class
43173 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43177 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43180 with three custom insets.
43183 Flex insets and InsetLayout
43187 Installing New Document Classes,
43188 The Layout file format
43194 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
43197 \begin_layout Subsection
43199 \begin_inset Index idx
43204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43213 \begin_layout Standard
43216 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files in your document.
43217 For more information see chapter
43219 External Document Parts
43222 \begin_inset space ~
43228 \begin_layout Subsection
43230 \begin_inset Index idx
43235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43244 \begin_layout Standard
43247 Inserts a box in a certain style.
43248 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
43255 \begin_inset space ~
43263 \begin_layout Subsection
43267 \begin_layout Standard
43274 dialog as described in section
43275 \begin_inset space ~
43279 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43281 reference "sec:Bibliography"
43289 \begin_layout Subsection
43293 \begin_layout Standard
43300 as described in section
43301 \begin_inset space ~
43305 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43307 reference "sec:Cross-References"
43315 \begin_layout Subsection
43319 \begin_layout Standard
43326 as described in section
43327 \begin_inset space ~
43331 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43333 reference "sec:Cross-References"
43341 \begin_layout Subsection
43343 \begin_inset Index idx
43348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43355 \begin_inset Index idx
43360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43371 \begin_layout Standard
43374 Inserts a caption in a float or multi-page table.
43375 Floats are described in section
43376 \begin_inset space ~
43380 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43382 reference "sec:Floats"
43388 captions in multi-page tables are described in the section
43390 Multi-page Captions
43395 \begin_inset space ~
43403 \begin_layout Subsection
43407 \begin_layout Standard
43410 Inserts an index entry as described in section
43411 \begin_inset space ~
43415 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43417 reference "sec:Index"
43425 \begin_layout Subsection
43429 \begin_layout Standard
43432 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
43433 \begin_inset space ~
43437 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43439 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
43447 \begin_layout Subsection
43451 \begin_layout Standard
43454 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
43455 Tables are described in section
43456 \begin_inset space ~
43460 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43462 reference "sec:Tables"
43467 and in detail in the chapter
43474 \begin_inset space ~
43482 \begin_layout Subsection
43486 \begin_layout Standard
43494 Graphics are described in section
43495 \begin_inset space ~
43499 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43501 reference "sec:Graphics"
43509 \begin_layout Subsection
43513 \begin_layout Standard
43516 Inserts a URL as described in section
43517 \begin_inset space ~
43521 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43523 reference "subsec:URLs"
43531 \begin_layout Subsection
43535 \begin_layout Standard
43538 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
43539 \begin_inset space ~
43543 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43545 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
43553 \begin_layout Subsection
43557 \begin_layout Standard
43560 Inserts a footnote as described in section
43561 \begin_inset space ~
43565 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43567 reference "sec:Footnotes"
43575 \begin_layout Subsection
43579 \begin_layout Standard
43582 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
43583 \begin_inset space ~
43587 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43589 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
43597 \begin_layout Subsection
43598 فاصل <اسم> (أعلى/أسفل)
43601 \begin_layout Standard
43604 These menu items are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive environments of the same type.
43606 \begin_inset space ~
43610 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43612 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
43617 for an explanation.
43620 \begin_layout Subsection
43624 \begin_layout Standard
43627 Is only visible if the cursor is in front,
43628 in or behind a section heading,
43629 title or caption of a float.
43630 Inserts a short title as described in section
43631 \begin_inset space ~
43635 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43637 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
43645 \begin_layout Subsection
43646 كود لتيكس \SpecialChar TeX
43650 \begin_layout Standard
43653 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
43654 Code box as described in section
43655 \begin_inset space ~
43659 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43661 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
43669 \begin_layout Subsection
43671 \begin_inset Index idx
43676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43685 \begin_layout Standard
43688 Inserts a program listings box.
43689 Program listings are explained in the chapter
43691 Program Code Listings
43696 \begin_inset space ~
43704 \begin_layout Subsection
43708 \begin_layout Standard
43711 Inserts the actual date.
43712 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for \SpecialChar LyX
43716 \begin_layout Subsection
43720 \begin_layout Standard
43723 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
43724 \begin_inset space ~
43728 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43730 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
43738 \begin_layout Section
43740 \begin_inset Index idx
43745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43755 \begin_layout Standard
43758 This menu lists the existing chapters,
43763 \begin_inset space ~
43766 of the current document.
43767 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
43770 \begin_layout Subsection
43774 \begin_layout Standard
43777 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
43778 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have to jump,
43781 \begin_inset space ~
43785 To create bookmarks for this example,
43787 \begin_inset space ~
43790 2.5 and use the submenu
43793 \begin_inset space ~
43797 \begin_inset space ~
43804 \begin_inset space ~
43810 \begin_inset space ~
43814 \begin_inset space ~
43820 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by the key bindings
43825 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
43835 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
43840 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
43843 \begin_layout Standard
43846 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
43850 \begin_inset space ~
43855 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
43858 \begin_inset space ~
43863 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
43866 \begin_layout Subsection
43872 \begin_layout Standard
43875 Jump to the next note,
43877 or cross-reference after the current cursor position.
43880 \begin_layout Subsection
43884 \begin_layout Standard
43887 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
43888 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
43889 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
43892 \begin_inset space ~
43896 \begin_inset space ~
43904 \begin_layout Subsection
43908 \begin_layout Standard
43911 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
43914 The \SpecialChar LyX
43915 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
43917 \begin_inset space ~
43925 \begin_inset space ~
43930 manual for a detailed description.
43933 \begin_layout Section
43935 \begin_inset Index idx
43940 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43950 \begin_layout Subsection
43954 \begin_layout Standard
43957 Change Tracking is described in section
43958 \begin_inset space ~
43962 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43964 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
43972 \begin_layout Subsection
43976 \begin_layout Standard
43979 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
43980 by viewing or exporting a document,
43981 this menu will be enabled.
43982 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43984 You can go to the next error or the next warning,
43986 copy something to the clipboard or update the view.
43987 \begin_inset Newline newline
43990 With the help of the logfile,
43991 experts can find reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
43995 \begin_layout Standard
44000 Open Containing Directory
44002 one can open \SpecialChar LyX
44003 's temporary folder for the document.
44004 This folder contains all converted and created files to generate the output.
44005 Some of these files might be of interest for experts to solve problems or for writers who need to supply intermediate files.
44006 For example some journals require to send the
44010 file (a text file with the used Bib\SpecialChar TeX
44014 \begin_layout Subsection
44018 \begin_layout Standard
44021 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position as described in section
44022 \begin_inset space ~
44026 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44028 reference "sec:Appendices"
44036 \begin_layout Subsection
44038 \begin_inset space ~
44044 \begin_layout Standard
44047 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as default output format for the document (menu
44049 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44050 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
44051 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
44053 \begin_inset space ~
44057 \begin_inset space ~
44064 \begin_inset space ~
44068 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44070 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
44075 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
44078 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
44079 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
44081 \begin_inset space ~
44084 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
44086 \begin_inset space ~
44089 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
44091 \begin_inset space ~
44095 \begin_inset space ~
44102 \begin_inset space ~
44106 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44108 reference "sec:File-Formats"
44113 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
44114 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
44116 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
44117 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
44119 \begin_inset space ~
44122 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
44124 \begin_inset space ~
44127 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
44132 \begin_inset space ~
44136 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44138 reference "sec:File-Formats"
44144 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
44145 when it is first configured.
44146 The default output format is
44149 \begin_inset space ~
44157 \begin_layout Subsection
44161 \begin_layout Standard
44164 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
44165 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the actual document with an external program.
44166 The menu entries are not the same on all installations —
44167 it depends on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44168 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
44170 All possible formats are listed in section
44171 \begin_inset space ~
44175 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44177 reference "subsec:Export"
44183 You should at least see the menu entry
44189 you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
44191 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
44195 \begin_inset space ~
44199 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44201 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
44207 \begin_inset Index idx
44212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44223 \begin_layout Standard
44226 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
44227 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
44229 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
44230 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
44232 \begin_inset space ~
44235 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
44237 \begin_inset space ~
44240 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
44245 \begin_inset space ~
44249 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44251 reference "sec:File-Formats"
44257 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
44258 when it is first configured.
44261 \begin_layout Subsection
44263 \begin_inset space ~
44269 \begin_layout Standard
44272 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
44275 \begin_layout Subsection
44279 \begin_layout Standard
44282 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of your document without opening a new viewer window.
44285 \begin_layout Subsection
44286 عرض المستند الرئيسي
44289 \begin_layout Standard
44292 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
44294 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44298 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44308 \begin_inset space ~
44313 manual for more information on this topic).
44314 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
44316 if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a book,
44320 \begin_inset space ~
44324 \begin_inset space ~
44329 generates the output of the whole book,
44334 will just output the chapter alone.
44337 \begin_layout Standard
44340 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified in the document settings (menu
44342 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44343 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
44344 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
44346 \begin_inset space ~
44350 \begin_inset space ~
44357 \begin_inset space ~
44361 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44363 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
44368 ) or in the preferences (menu
44370 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
44371 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
44373 \begin_inset space ~
44376 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
44378 \begin_inset space ~
44381 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
44383 \begin_inset space ~
44387 \begin_inset space ~
44394 \begin_inset space ~
44398 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44400 reference "sec:File-Formats"
44408 \begin_layout Subsection
44409 تحديث المستند الرئيسي
44412 \begin_layout Standard
44415 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
44417 \begin_inset Quotes eld
44421 \begin_inset Quotes erd
44431 \begin_inset space ~
44436 manual for more information on this topic).
44437 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
44440 \begin_layout Standard
44443 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified in the document settings (menu
44445 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44446 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
44447 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
44449 \begin_inset space ~
44453 \begin_inset space ~
44460 \begin_inset space ~
44464 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44466 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
44471 ) or in the preferences (menu
44473 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
44474 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
44476 \begin_inset space ~
44479 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
44481 \begin_inset space ~
44484 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
44486 \begin_inset space ~
44490 \begin_inset space ~
44497 \begin_inset space ~
44501 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44503 reference "sec:File-Formats"
44511 \begin_layout Subsection
44513 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44515 name "subsec:Compressed"
44522 \begin_layout Standard
44525 Un/compresses the current document.
44526 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable compression (see the
44528 Additional Features
44530 manual for details).
44533 \begin_layout Subsection
44537 \begin_layout Standard
44540 Toggles the read-only state for the document.
44543 \begin_layout Subsection
44547 \begin_layout Standard
44550 The document settings are described in appendix
44551 \begin_inset space ~
44555 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44557 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
44565 \begin_layout Section
44567 \begin_inset Index idx
44572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44582 \begin_layout Subsection
44586 \begin_layout Standard
44587 المدقق الإملائي مشروح في القسم
44588 \begin_inset space ~
44592 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44594 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
44602 \begin_layout Subsection
44606 \begin_layout Standard
44607 المكنز مشروح في القسم
44608 \begin_inset space ~
44612 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44614 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
44622 \begin_layout Subsection
44624 \begin_inset Index idx
44629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44636 \begin_inset Index idx
44641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44650 \begin_layout Standard
44653 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or the highlighted document part.
44656 \begin_layout Subsection
44658 \begin_inset Index idx
44663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44672 \begin_layout Standard
44675 Generates with the help of the program
44677 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
44680 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
44681 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
44682 This feature is not available on Windows.
44685 \begin_layout Subsection
44687 \begin_inset Index idx
44692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44701 \begin_layout Standard
44704 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
44709 \begin_inset space ~
44714 to see the full filename paths.
44717 \begin_layout Subsection
44719 \begin_inset Index idx
44724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44733 \begin_layout Standard
44736 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
44737 files as described in section
44738 \begin_inset space ~
44742 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44744 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
44752 \begin_layout Subsection
44754 \begin_inset Index idx
44759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44772 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
44777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44790 \begin_inset Index idx
44795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44804 \begin_layout Standard
44807 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
44811 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
44812 -packages and programs it needs;
44814 \begin_inset space ~
44818 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44820 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
44828 \begin_layout Subsection
44832 \begin_layout Standard
44839 dialog as described in detail in appendix
44840 \begin_inset space ~
44844 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44846 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
44854 \begin_layout Section
44856 \begin_inset Index idx
44861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44871 \begin_layout Standard
44874 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
44875 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
44877 If a file is not available in this language,
44878 the English version will be listed.
44881 \begin_layout Standard
44887 \begin_inset space ~
44892 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
44893 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44894 packages and classes found by \SpecialChar LyX
44896 \begin_inset space ~
44900 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44902 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
44910 \begin_layout Standard
44916 \begin_inset space ~
44921 gives information about the copyright,
44922 the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
44923 version you are using.
44926 \begin_layout Section
44928 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44930 name "sec:Toolbars"
44937 \begin_layout Standard
44940 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
44941 \begin_inset space ~
44945 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44947 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
44955 \begin_layout Standard
44958 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
44959 This is described in the
44961 Additional Features
44966 \begin_layout Subsection
44968 \begin_inset Index idx
44973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44983 \begin_layout Standard
44984 \begin_inset Graphics
44985 filename ../clipart/StandardToolbar.png
44993 \begin_layout Standard
44994 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
45000 \begin_layout Standard
45001 شريط الأدوات الأساسي الذي يظهر في أعلى النافذة يحتوي على مجموعة من الوظائف،
45002 هي من اليمين لليسار:
45006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45018 \begin_inset Note Note
45021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45024 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
45029 manual for more information.
45037 \begin_layout Standard
45038 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
45044 \begin_layout Standard
45045 \begin_inset Tabular
45046 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
45047 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
45048 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
45049 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
45051 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45055 \begin_inset Graphics
45056 filename ../clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
45066 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45070 قائمة منسدلة بالبيئات التنسيقية المتوفرة في نوع المستند
45083 \begin_layout Standard
45084 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
45090 \begin_layout Standard
45092 \begin_inset Tabular
45093 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="22" columns="2">
45094 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
45095 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
45096 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
45097 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45098 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45114 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45120 ملف\SpecialChar menuseparator
45127 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45128 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45144 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45150 ملف\SpecialChar menuseparator
45157 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45158 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45174 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45180 ملف\SpecialChar menuseparator
45187 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45188 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45196 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
45204 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45210 أدوات\SpecialChar menuseparator
45217 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45218 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45226 arg "spelling-continuously"
45234 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45238 المصحح الإملائي المستمر
45244 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45245 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45261 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45264 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45267 تحرير\SpecialChar menuseparator
45274 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45275 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45291 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45297 تحرير\SpecialChar menuseparator
45304 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45305 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45321 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45327 تحرير\SpecialChar menuseparator
45334 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45335 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45338 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45351 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45357 تحرير\SpecialChar menuseparator
45364 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45365 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45381 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45387 تحرير\SpecialChar menuseparator
45394 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45395 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45403 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
45411 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45417 تحرير\SpecialChar menuseparator
45419 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45423 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45427 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45436 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45437 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45443 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
45451 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45454 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45457 تحرير\SpecialChar menuseparator
45459 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45463 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45467 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45476 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45477 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45485 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
45493 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45499 استكشاف\SpecialChar menuseparator
45500 العلامات\SpecialChar menuseparator
45507 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45508 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45524 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45531 \SpecialChar menuseparator
45533 \begin_inset space ~
45536 أسلوب\SpecialChar menuseparator
45543 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45544 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45560 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45567 \SpecialChar menuseparator
45569 \begin_inset space ~
45572 أسلوب\SpecialChar menuseparator
45579 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45580 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45588 arg "textstyle-apply"
45596 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45600 تهيئة النص حسب إعدادات التحرير الحالية
45602 \SpecialChar menuseparator
45604 \begin_inset space ~
45607 أسلوب\SpecialChar menuseparator
45616 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45617 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45633 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45639 إدراج\SpecialChar menuseparator
45640 رياضيات\SpecialChar menuseparator
45642 \begin_inset space ~
45651 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45652 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45660 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
45668 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45674 إدراج\SpecialChar menuseparator
45681 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45682 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45688 arg "tabular-insert"
45696 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45702 إدراج\SpecialChar menuseparator
45709 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45710 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45718 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
45726 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45730 فتح وغلق نافذة الخلاصة،
45733 عرض\SpecialChar menuseparator
45740 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45741 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45749 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
45757 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45761 فتح وغلق شريط الرياضيات
45767 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45768 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45776 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
45784 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45788 فتح وغلق شريط الجدول
45801 \begin_layout Subsection
45803 \begin_inset Index idx
45808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45818 \begin_layout Standard
45819 \begin_inset Graphics
45820 filename ../clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
45828 \begin_layout Standard
45829 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
45835 \begin_layout Standard
45836 شريط الأدوات الإضافي الذي يظهر فوق النص مباشرة يحتوي على مجموعة من الوظائف،
45837 هي من اليمين لليسار:
45840 \begin_layout Standard
45841 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
45847 \begin_layout Standard
45848 \begin_inset Tabular
45849 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="25" columns="2">
45850 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
45851 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
45852 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
45853 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45854 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45870 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45880 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45881 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45889 arg "layout-toggle Enumerate"
45897 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45907 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45908 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45916 arg "layout-toggle Itemize"
45924 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45934 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45935 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45943 arg "layout-toggle List"
45951 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45961 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45962 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45970 arg "layout-toggle Description"
45978 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45988 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
45989 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
45992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45997 arg "depth-increment"
46005 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46011 تحرير\SpecialChar menuseparator
46013 \begin_inset space ~
46017 \begin_inset space ~
46026 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46027 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46035 arg "depth-decrement"
46043 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46049 تحرير\SpecialChar menuseparator
46051 \begin_inset space ~
46055 \begin_inset space ~
46064 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46065 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46073 arg "float-insert figure"
46081 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46087 إدراج\SpecialChar menuseparator
46088 تعويم\SpecialChar menuseparator
46095 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46096 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46104 arg "float-insert table"
46112 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46118 إدراج\SpecialChar menuseparator
46119 تعويم\SpecialChar menuseparator
46126 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46127 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46130 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46143 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46149 إدراج\SpecialChar menuseparator
46156 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46157 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46160 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46165 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
46173 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46179 إدراج\SpecialChar menuseparator
46186 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46187 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46195 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
46203 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46209 إدراج\SpecialChar menuseparator
46216 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46217 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46233 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46239 إدراج\SpecialChar menuseparator
46241 \begin_inset space ~
46250 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46251 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46259 arg "nomencl-insert"
46267 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46273 إدراج\SpecialChar menuseparator
46275 \begin_inset space ~
46284 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46285 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46293 arg "footnote-insert"
46301 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46307 إدراج\SpecialChar menuseparator
46314 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46315 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46323 arg "marginalnote-insert"
46331 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46337 إدراج\SpecialChar menuseparator
46339 \begin_inset space ~
46348 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46349 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46365 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46371 إدراج\SpecialChar menuseparator
46372 ملاحظة\SpecialChar menuseparator
46374 \begin_inset space ~
46383 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46384 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46392 arg "box-insert Frameless"
46400 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46406 إدراج\SpecialChar menuseparator
46413 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46414 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46430 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46436 إدراج\SpecialChar menuseparator
46443 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46444 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46460 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46466 إدراج\SpecialChar menuseparator
46468 \begin_inset space ~
46477 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46478 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46486 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
46494 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46500 إدراج\SpecialChar menuseparator
46501 رياضيات\SpecialChar menuseparator
46508 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46509 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46517 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
46525 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46531 إدراج\SpecialChar menuseparator
46532 ملف\SpecialChar menuseparator
46534 \begin_inset space ~
46543 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46544 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46552 arg "dialog-show character"
46560 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46566 تحرير\SpecialChar menuseparator
46568 \begin_inset space ~
46571 النص\SpecialChar menuseparator
46578 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46579 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46587 arg "layout-paragraph"
46595 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46598 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46601 تحرير\SpecialChar menuseparator
46603 \begin_inset space ~
46612 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46613 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46621 arg "thesaurus-entry"
46629 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46635 أدوات\SpecialChar menuseparator
46649 \begin_layout Subsection
46650 عرض/تحديث شريط الأدوات
46651 \begin_inset Index idx
46656 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46666 \begin_layout Standard
46667 \begin_inset Graphics
46668 filename ../clipart/ViewToolbar.png
46675 \begin_layout Standard
46678 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
46684 \begin_layout Standard
46687 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following buttons:
46690 \begin_layout Standard
46693 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
46699 \begin_layout Standard
46700 \begin_inset Tabular
46701 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
46702 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
46703 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
46704 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
46705 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46706 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46722 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46729 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46736 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46737 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46745 arg "buffer-update"
46753 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46760 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46767 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46768 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46771 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46776 arg "master-buffer-view"
46784 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46791 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46793 \begin_inset space ~
46802 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46803 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46811 arg "master-buffer-update"
46819 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46826 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46828 \begin_inset space ~
46832 \begin_inset space ~
46841 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46842 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46850 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
46858 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46865 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46866 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
46867 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
46868 Synchronize with Output
46874 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46875 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46891 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46898 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46899 View (Other Formats)
46905 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
46906 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46912 arg "update-others"
46920 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
46923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46927 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46928 Update (Other Formats)
46941 \begin_layout Standard
46944 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default icon set.
46947 \begin_layout Subsection
46948 أشرطة الأدوات الأخرى
46951 \begin_layout Standard
46954 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
46955 \begin_inset space ~
46959 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46961 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
46970 \begin_inset Index idx
46975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46987 \begin_inset space ~
46992 manual and the math macro toolbar
46995 \begin_inset Index idx
47000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47016 \begin_layout Chapter
47018 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47020 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
47025 \begin_inset Index idx
47030 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47040 \begin_layout Standard
47046 \begin_inset space ~
47051 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and is called with the menu
47053 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
47057 You can save your document settings as default with the
47059 Save as Document Defaults
47061 button in any dialog.
47062 This will create a template named
47066 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
47067 when you create a new document without using a template.
47070 \begin_layout Standard
47077 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
47078 This affects mostly class options,
47079 the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
47082 \begin_layout Standard
47085 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
47086 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while to find the one you are looking for.
47087 To find a setting quicker,
47088 you can use the search field which is above the submenus of the dialog.
47090 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47094 \begin_inset space \space{}
47098 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47102 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47106 you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
47107 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
47108 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
47111 \begin_layout Section
47115 \begin_layout Standard
47118 Here you set the document class,
47121 and a master document.
47122 Document classes are described in section
47123 \begin_inset space ~
47127 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47129 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
47138 \begin_layout Standard
47144 \begin_inset space ~
47149 you can load you own layout-file,
47150 that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
47155 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
47156 as a layout for a document class.
47157 For more about layout-files,
47160 Installing New Document Classes,
47161 Types of Layout Files
47170 \begin_layout Standard
47173 Some classes use special class options by default.
47174 If this is the case,
47175 they are listed in the field
47179 and you can decide to use them or not.
47180 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for,
47181 it is recommended you leave them untouched.
47186 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
47188 color and page layout packages.
47194 the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47196 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are doing.
47200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47203 When you want to use one of the following drivers
47204 \begin_inset Newline newline
47218 \begin_inset Newline newline
47221 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
47228 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47230 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
47243 \begin_layout Standard
47250 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
47251 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
47252 in the background if the child document is opened without its master.
47253 This way child documents are always compilable.
47254 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
47261 \begin_inset space ~
47269 \begin_layout Standard
47272 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47284 \begin_inset Index idx
47289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47297 \begin_inset Index idx
47302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47311 for cross-references,
47315 \begin_inset space ~
47319 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47321 reference "sec:Cross-References"
47329 \begin_layout Section
47333 \begin_layout Standard
47336 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
47337 Please refer to the section
47340 \begin_inset space ~
47348 \begin_inset space ~
47353 manual for details.
47356 \begin_layout Section
47360 \begin_layout Standard
47363 Modules are explained in section
47364 \begin_inset space ~
47368 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47370 reference "subsec:Modules"
47378 \begin_layout Section
47382 \begin_layout Standard
47386 \begin_inset space ~
47390 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47392 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
47400 \begin_layout Section
47404 \begin_layout Standard
47407 The document font settings are described in section
47408 \begin_inset space ~
47412 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47414 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
47422 \begin_layout Section
47426 \begin_layout Standard
47429 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
47441 \begin_inset space ~
47446 and whether it should be a
47449 \begin_inset space ~
47454 can also be specified here.
47457 \begin_layout Standard
47460 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
47461 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
47462 That would be impractical,
47464 and is not part of the WYSIWYM concept.
47466 it will be as you specified in the output.
47469 \begin_layout Standard
47474 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
47477 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
47478 justifies the text on screen.
47479 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
47483 \begin_layout Section
47487 \begin_layout Standard
47490 This dialog is described in sections
47491 \begin_inset space ~
47495 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47497 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
47503 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47505 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
47513 \begin_layout Section
47517 \begin_layout Standard
47520 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
47521 \begin_inset space ~
47525 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47527 reference "subsec:Margins"
47535 \begin_layout Section
47537 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47539 name "sec:Language-encodings"
47544 \begin_inset Index idx
47549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47559 \begin_layout Standard
47562 The document language and quote styles are set here.
47563 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
47564 (the \SpecialChar LyX
47565 file is always encoded in utf8).
47566 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
47567 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
47568 -command is not known for a particular character).
47571 \begin_layout Standard
47574 If you use the option
47580 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
47581 If the document contains text in more than one language you may get more than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47583 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use exactly one encoding.
47584 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
47587 \begin_layout Standard
47591 also supports Unicode output,
47592 which is particularly useful if you need lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts,
47594 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
47595 installation supports Unicode),
47596 choose one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
47597 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
47598 is quite incomplete,
47599 so it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine with
47603 (when \SpecialChar LyX
47604 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
47606 but does not work with a fixed utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
47607 -commands is not used,
47608 because all Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
47609 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
47610 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
47612 two new alternative engines to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
47614 Both engines support Unicode natively.
47616 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
47619 \begin_inset space ~
47628 \begin_inset space ~
47636 \begin_inset space ~
47643 \begin_inset space ~
47647 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47649 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
47655 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
47660 you might try out one of these new engines.
47663 \begin_layout Standard
47669 \begin_inset space ~
47674 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47675 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation of strings like
47676 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47680 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47684 The possible settings are:
47687 \begin_layout Description
47690 Default uses the language package that is selected in
47692 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
47693 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
47697 \begin_inset space ~
47701 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47703 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
47711 \begin_layout Description
47714 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export format you will use.
47715 In many cases this will be
47722 \begin_inset Index idx
47727 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47737 If the newer package
47744 \begin_inset Index idx
47749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47758 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
47759 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
47760 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
47762 this package will be used instead of
47769 \begin_layout Description
47773 \begin_inset space ~
47784 would be more appropriate.
47787 \begin_layout Description
47790 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
47791 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
47795 (for German texts),
47799 \begin_inset Newline newline
47804 usepackage{ngerman}
47807 \begin_layout Description
47810 None will not use a language package.
47811 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
47814 \begin_layout Standard
47817 Here is a list with the important encodings:
47820 \begin_layout Description
47824 \begin_inset space ~
47828 \begin_inset space ~
47832 \begin_inset space ~
47840 but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47848 \begin_inset Index idx
47853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47864 you probably need to load some additional packages manually in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign languages in \SpecialChar TeX
47868 \begin_layout Description
47871 ASCII the ASCII encoding,
47872 covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
47874 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
47876 which may result in a big file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
47877 -commands are needed.
47880 \begin_layout Description
47884 \begin_inset space ~
47888 \begin_inset space ~
47891 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
47894 \begin_layout Description
47898 \begin_inset space ~
47902 \begin_inset space ~
47905 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
47908 \begin_layout Description
47912 \begin_inset space ~
47915 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
47918 \begin_layout Description
47922 \begin_inset space ~
47926 \begin_inset space ~
47929 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian,
47930 Latvian and Lithuanian,
47931 the same as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
47934 \begin_layout Description
47938 \begin_inset space ~
47942 \begin_inset space ~
47945 8859-13) for Estonian,
47946 Latvian and Lithuanian,
47947 a superset of the ISO-8859-4 encoding
47950 \begin_layout Description
47954 \begin_inset space ~
47958 \begin_inset space ~
47961 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian,
47962 Latvian and Lithuanian,
47963 a subset of the ISO-8859-13 encoding
47966 \begin_layout Description
47970 \begin_inset space ~
47974 \begin_inset space ~
47978 \begin_inset space ~
47981 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
47982 \begin_inset space ~
47988 \begin_layout Description
47992 \begin_inset space ~
47996 \begin_inset space ~
48000 \begin_inset space ~
48003 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian,
48010 Slovak and Slovenian
48013 \begin_layout Description
48017 \begin_inset space ~
48021 \begin_inset space ~
48024 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese,
48025 used especially on UNIX OSes,
48026 since 2001 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030,
48027 as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
48028 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
48029 \begin_inset space ~
48033 \begin_inset space ~
48039 \begin_layout Description
48043 \begin_inset space ~
48047 \begin_inset space ~
48050 (GBK) for simplified Chinese,
48051 is the same as the Windows code page CP 936 except for the Euro currency sign,
48052 since 2001 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030,
48053 as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
48054 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
48055 \begin_inset space ~
48059 \begin_inset space ~
48065 \begin_layout Description
48069 \begin_inset space ~
48073 \begin_inset space ~
48076 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
48079 \begin_layout Description
48083 \begin_inset space ~
48087 \begin_inset space ~
48090 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
48093 \begin_layout Description
48097 \begin_inset space ~
48101 \begin_inset space ~
48104 8859-5) covers Belorussian,
48107 Serbian and Ukrainian
48110 \begin_layout Description
48114 \begin_inset space ~
48117 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
48120 \begin_layout Description
48124 \begin_inset space ~
48127 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
48130 \begin_layout Description
48134 \begin_inset space ~
48138 \begin_inset space ~
48141 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
48144 \begin_layout Description
48148 \begin_inset space ~
48152 \begin_inset space ~
48158 \begin_layout Description
48162 \begin_inset space ~
48166 \begin_inset space ~
48169 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew,
48170 a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
48173 \begin_layout Description
48177 \begin_inset space ~
48181 \begin_inset space ~
48187 \begin_layout Description
48191 \begin_inset space ~
48195 \begin_inset space ~
48198 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese,
48199 uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48207 \begin_inset Index idx
48212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48223 set the document language to
48228 \begin_layout Description
48232 \begin_inset space ~
48236 \begin_inset space ~
48239 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese,
48240 uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48247 set the document language to
48250 \begin_inset space ~
48256 \begin_layout Description
48260 \begin_inset space ~
48264 \begin_inset space ~
48267 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese,
48268 uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48276 \begin_inset Index idx
48281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48292 set the document language to
48297 \begin_layout Description
48301 \begin_inset space ~
48305 \begin_inset space ~
48308 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese,
48309 uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48316 set the document language to
48321 \begin_layout Description
48325 \begin_inset space ~
48329 \begin_inset space ~
48332 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese,
48333 uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48340 set the document language to
48345 \begin_layout Description
48349 \begin_inset space ~
48352 (EUC-KR) for Korean
48355 \begin_layout Description
48359 \begin_inset space ~
48363 \begin_inset space ~
48367 \begin_inset space ~
48370 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto,
48372 Maltese and Turkish
48375 \begin_layout Description
48379 \begin_inset space ~
48383 \begin_inset space ~
48387 \begin_inset space ~
48390 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian,
48399 Romanian and Slovenian,
48400 is designed to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
48403 \begin_layout Description
48407 \begin_inset space ~
48411 \begin_inset space ~
48417 \begin_layout Description
48421 \begin_inset space ~
48425 \begin_inset space ~
48428 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish,
48429 is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
48432 \begin_layout Description
48436 \begin_inset space ~
48440 \begin_inset space ~
48443 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48451 \begin_inset Index idx
48456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48465 (for the languages Chinese,
48466 Japanese and Korean)
48469 \begin_layout Description
48473 \begin_inset space ~
48481 \begin_inset space ~
48484 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
48491 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
48495 which use Unicode directly,
48496 without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48503 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
48504 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
48506 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
48509 \begin_layout Description
48513 \begin_inset space ~
48517 \begin_inset space ~
48520 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48528 \begin_inset Index idx
48533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48545 Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
48548 \begin_layout Description
48552 \begin_inset space ~
48555 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
48563 \begin_inset Index idx
48568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48578 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts) is supported.
48581 \begin_layout Description
48585 \begin_inset space ~
48589 \begin_inset space ~
48593 \begin_inset space ~
48596 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
48597 \begin_inset space ~
48603 \begin_layout Description
48607 \begin_inset space ~
48611 \begin_inset space ~
48615 \begin_inset space ~
48618 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian,
48633 Spanish and Swedish;
48634 better use the ISO-8859-15 encoding instead
48637 \begin_layout Description
48641 \begin_inset space ~
48645 \begin_inset space ~
48649 \begin_inset space ~
48652 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding,
48653 but with the Euro currency sign,
48654 the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
48657 \begin_layout Section
48659 \begin_inset Index idx
48664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48672 \begin_inset Index idx
48677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48685 \begin_inset Index idx
48690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48698 \begin_inset Index idx
48703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48713 \begin_layout Standard
48716 Here you can alter the font color for the
48725 \begin_inset space ~
48731 light grey)for the background color for the
48739 \begin_inset space ~
48750 sets the color back to the default.
48753 \begin_layout Standard
48756 Clicking any button showing
48764 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
48765 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them later more quickly.
48768 \begin_layout Standard
48775 \begin_inset space ~
48780 font color and use the option
48783 \begin_inset space ~
48788 in the document settings under
48791 \begin_inset space ~
48797 you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
48798 \begin_inset space ~
48802 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48804 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
48812 \begin_layout Standard
48815 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
48821 \begin_layout Standard
48827 \begin_inset space ~
48836 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as \SpecialChar TeX
48838 \begin_inset space ~
48841 Code after a forced page break:
48844 \begin_layout Itemize
48847 For the page color:
48848 \begin_inset Newline newline
48855 pagecolor{color name}
48858 \begin_layout Itemize
48861 For the text color:
48862 \begin_inset Newline newline
48872 \begin_layout Standard
48875 You are restricted to one of
48917 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
48924 \begin_inset space ~
48930 \begin_inset Newline newline
48933 If you have changed a text or background color,
48934 you can use the following names to refer to them:
48937 \begin_layout Itemize
48945 \begin_inset Newline newline
48950 page_backgroundcolor
48953 \begin_layout Itemize
48959 \begin_inset space ~
48965 \begin_inset Newline newline
48973 \begin_layout Itemize
48979 \begin_inset space ~
48985 \begin_inset Newline newline
48993 \begin_layout Itemize
48999 \begin_inset space ~
49005 \begin_inset Newline newline
49013 \begin_layout Standard
49016 To see how to define and use custom colors,
49020 \begin_inset space ~
49028 \begin_inset space ~
49036 \begin_layout Section
49037 الترقيم & جدول المحتويات
49040 \begin_layout Standard
49043 Here you can adjust the
49047 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
49051 as described in section
49052 \begin_inset space ~
49056 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49058 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
49066 \begin_layout Section
49070 \begin_layout Standard
49073 Here you can specify if a specific citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49081 \begin_inset Index idx
49086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49099 \begin_inset Index idx
49104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49120 \begin_inset Index idx
49125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49135 If you use Bib\SpecialChar TeX
49139 Sectioned bibliography
49141 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49149 \begin_inset Index idx
49154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49169 you can select the style files and specify further options.
49171 you can select a document-specific
49175 for the generation of the bibliography.
49176 For a further description of these possibilities see section
49177 \begin_inset space ~
49181 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49183 reference "sec:Bibliography"
49191 \begin_layout Section
49195 \begin_layout Standard
49198 Here you can define the
49202 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see section
49203 \begin_inset space ~
49207 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49209 reference "sec:Index"
49217 \begin_layout Section
49221 \begin_layout Standard
49224 The PDF properties are explained in section
49227 \begin_inset space ~
49231 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49233 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
49241 \begin_layout Section
49245 \begin_layout Standard
49248 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
49249 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49257 \begin_inset Index idx
49262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49275 \begin_inset Index idx
49280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49293 \begin_inset Index idx
49298 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49311 \begin_inset Index idx
49316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49329 \begin_inset Index idx
49334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49347 \begin_inset Index idx
49352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49365 \begin_inset Index idx
49370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49383 \begin_inset Index idx
49388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49401 \begin_inset Index idx
49406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49418 \begin_inset Index idx
49423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49433 or to use them automatically when they are needed.
49436 \begin_layout Description
49439 amsmath is needed for many constructs,
49440 so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
49441 -errors in formulas,
49442 ensure that you have this enabled.
49445 \begin_layout Description
49448 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek letters,
49449 so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
49450 -errors in formulas,
49451 ensure that you have this enabled.
49454 \begin_layout Description
49457 cancel is used for canceled formulas,
49461 \begin_inset space ~
49473 \begin_layout Description
49476 esint is used for special integral characters,
49480 \begin_inset space ~
49492 \begin_layout Description
49495 mathdots is used for special ellipses,
49507 \begin_layout Description
49510 mathtools is used for the math commands
49551 and labeled arrows,
49552 see the corresponding sections in the
49559 \begin_layout Description
49562 mhchem is used for chemical equations,
49565 Chemical Symbols and Equations
49574 \begin_layout Description
49577 stackrel is used for the math command
49595 \begin_layout Description
49598 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
49601 \begin_layout Description
49604 undertilde is used for the math command
49613 Accents for one Character
49622 \begin_layout Section
49626 \begin_layout Standard
49629 The float placement options are described in the section
49632 \begin_inset space ~
49640 \begin_inset space ~
49648 \begin_layout Section
49652 \begin_layout Standard
49655 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
49657 Program Code Listings
49662 \begin_inset space ~
49670 \begin_layout Section
49674 \begin_layout Standard
49677 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
49686 set to be used and set the
49691 The itemize environment is described in section
49692 \begin_inset space ~
49696 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49698 reference "sec:Itemize"
49706 \begin_layout Standard
49709 You can furthermore specify a
49712 \begin_inset space ~
49717 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49718 command of the desired character.
49719 For example to use the € sign,
49720 you have to insert the command
49727 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
49729 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49733 \begin_inset space \space{}
49737 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
49747 To find the command for a math symbol,
49748 create a formula and hover the mouse over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
49751 \begin_layout Standard
49754 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
49757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49764 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
49765 -packages in the preamble (menu
49767 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
49768 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
49771 \begin_inset space ~
49777 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
49781 usepackage{textcomp}
49784 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
49788 usepackage{amssymb}
49798 \begin_layout Section
49802 \begin_layout Standard
49805 Branches are described in section
49806 \begin_inset space ~
49810 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49812 reference "sec:Branches"
49820 \begin_layout Section
49822 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49824 name "sec:Doc-Formats"
49831 \begin_layout Standard
49834 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
49837 \begin_layout Description
49841 \begin_inset space ~
49845 \begin_inset space ~
49849 The format that is used when you enter
49850 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49854 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49859 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49863 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49868 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49871 View Master Document
49872 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49876 \begin_inset Quotes eld
49879 Update Master Document
49880 \begin_inset Quotes erd
49887 menu or the toolbar.
49888 The default is set in
49890 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
49891 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
49893 \begin_inset space ~
49896 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
49901 \begin_inset space ~
49905 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
49907 reference "sec:File-Formats"
49915 \begin_layout Description
49919 \begin_inset space ~
49923 \begin_inset space ~
49926 Output settings for the menu
49928 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
49930 \begin_inset space ~
49936 For a detailed description see section
49938 Reverse DVI/PDF search
49943 \begin_inset space ~
49951 \begin_layout Description
49955 \begin_inset space ~
49959 \begin_inset space ~
49962 Options offers settings for the export format
49970 \begin_inset space ~
49975 will assure that the output follows exactly version
49976 \begin_inset space ~
49979 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
49983 \begin_inset space ~
49988 settings are described in detail in section
49990 Math Output in XHTML
49995 \begin_inset space ~
50004 \begin_inset space ~
50008 \begin_inset space ~
50013 is used for the size of equations in the output.
50016 \begin_layout Description
50020 \begin_inset space ~
50025 Save transient properties
50027 controls whether document settings that are frequently switched or that are specific to the user are saved with the document.
50028 The properties that are affected by option are currently:
50032 \begin_layout Itemize
50035 the activation of change tracking
50038 \begin_layout Itemize
50041 the output of tracked changes
50044 \begin_layout Itemize
50047 the recording of the document directory path.
50050 \begin_layout Standard
50053 Disabling the option can prevent issues in collaborative work and/or when using a version control system (for instance unnecessary merge conflicts).
50057 \begin_layout Section
50061 \begin_layout Standard
50064 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
50065 -packages or to define \SpecialChar LaTeX
50067 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
50069 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are doing.
50072 \begin_layout Standard
50075 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50076 -syntax is given in section
50077 \begin_inset space ~
50081 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50083 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
50091 \begin_layout Chapter
50093 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50095 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
50100 \begin_inset Index idx
50105 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50114 \begin_layout Standard
50117 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
50119 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
50123 It has the following submenus.
50126 \begin_layout Section
50130 \begin_layout Subsection
50134 \begin_layout Subsubsection
50136 \begin_inset Index idx
50141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50149 \begin_inset Index idx
50154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50164 \begin_layout Standard
50167 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user interface (ui) file.
50168 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
50176 \begin_layout Description
50183 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
50186 \begin_layout Description
50195 the menu entries in popup context menus
50198 \begin_layout Description
50205 specifies the toolbar buttons
50208 \begin_layout Standard
50211 To create your own menu and toolbar layout,
50212 start with a copy of these files and edit the entries.
50215 \begin_layout Standard
50218 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward:
50232 entries must be finished with an explicit
50262 and in the case of the
50263 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50267 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50275 The syntax for the entries is:
50278 \begin_layout Standard
50281 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
50287 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50295 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50299 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50304 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50310 \begin_layout Standard
50314 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
50317 All the \SpecialChar LyX
50318 -functions are listed in the menu
50320 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
50322 \begin_inset space ~
50330 \begin_layout Standard
50333 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
50339 \begin_layout Standard
50343 assuming you use the menu
50345 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
50348 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks,
50349 you can add the line
50352 \begin_layout Standard
50355 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
50361 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50365 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50369 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50373 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50379 \begin_layout Standard
50383 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
50387 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50391 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50398 to have the sixth bookmark.
50401 \begin_layout Standard
50406 \begin_inset space ~
50411 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
50412 's toolbar buttons.
50413 The currently available icon sets are compared in
50414 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50417 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
50425 \begin_layout Subsubsection
50429 \begin_layout Standard
50434 Enable tool tips in main work area
50436 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries or footnotes.
50439 \begin_layout Subsubsection
50443 \begin_layout Standard
50449 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
50450 should display in the menu
50452 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
50454 \begin_inset space ~
50462 \begin_layout Subsection
50466 \begin_layout Subsubsection
50470 \begin_layout Standard
50475 Restore window layouts and geometries
50478 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in the last \SpecialChar LyX
50482 \begin_layout Standard
50487 Restore cursor positions
50489 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of the last session.
50492 \begin_layout Standard
50497 Load opened files from last session
50499 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
50503 \begin_layout Standard
50508 Clear all session information
50510 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
50511 sessions (cursor positions,
50512 names of last opened documents,
50516 \begin_layout Subsubsection
50517 النسخ الاحتياطي & الحفظ
50518 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50520 name "subsec:Backup documents"
50525 \begin_inset Index idx
50530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50540 \begin_layout Standard
50544 Backup original documents when saving
50546 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when it was saved the last time.
50547 It is stored in the
50550 \begin_inset space ~
50556 \begin_inset space ~
50560 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50562 reference "sec:Paths"
50567 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
50570 \begin_inset space ~
50576 The backup file has the file extension
50577 \begin_inset Quotes eld
50585 \begin_inset Quotes erd
50591 \begin_layout Standard
50600 you can specify the time between backup saves.
50603 \begin_layout Standard
50607 Save documents compressed by default
50609 always saves files in a compressed format (see also section
50610 \begin_inset space ~
50614 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50616 reference "subsec:Compressed"
50622 This applies to newly created documents only.
50623 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving.
50626 \begin_layout Subsubsection
50627 النافذة & مساحة العمل
50630 \begin_layout Standard
50635 Open documents in tabs
50638 every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
50642 \begin_layout Standard
50649 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
50654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50658 \begin_inset space ~
50662 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50664 reference "sec:Paths"
50669 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
50678 documents will be opened in the same running instance of \SpecialChar LyX
50680 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
50681 instance is created for each file.
50684 \begin_layout Standard
50689 Single close-tab button
50692 there will only be one close button (
50704 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
50705 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
50706 Regardless of this option,
50707 one can always close a tab by middle-clicking it in the tab bar.
50710 \begin_layout Standard
50713 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
50716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50723 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
50724 before the change takes effect.
50732 \begin_layout Standard
50739 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view is closed.
50740 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
50742 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
50746 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several instances of \SpecialChar LyX
50747 and only want to close the view in once instance.
50750 \begin_layout Subsection
50752 \begin_inset Index idx
50757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50765 \begin_inset CommandInset label
50767 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
50774 \begin_layout Standard
50777 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
50781 \begin_layout Standard
50784 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
50787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50794 This section only deals with the fonts
50798 the \SpecialChar LyX
50800 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts,
50801 and set in the menu
50803 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
50804 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
50815 \begin_layout Standard
50837 (depends on the system) as its
50840 \begin_inset space ~
50856 \begin_layout Standard
50859 You can change the font size with the
50866 \begin_layout Standard
50873 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
50875 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50878 points have the size of 1
50879 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50884 \begin_inset space ~
50888 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50890 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
50896 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
50897 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
50901 The sizes are explained in detail in section
50902 \begin_inset space ~
50906 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
50908 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
50916 \begin_layout Subsection
50918 \begin_inset Index idx
50923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50931 \begin_inset Index idx
50936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50946 \begin_layout Standard
50949 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
50950 by choosing an item in the list and selecting the
50957 \begin_layout Standard
50960 By checking the option
50964 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
50972 \begin_inset space ~
50976 \begin_inset space ~
50981 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
50984 \begin_layout Subsection
50986 \begin_inset Index idx
50991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51001 \begin_layout Standard
51004 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
51008 \begin_layout Standard
51014 enables previewing snippets of your document.
51015 This feature is described in section
51016 \begin_inset space ~
51020 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51022 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
51030 \begin_layout Standard
51033 Checking the option
51036 \begin_inset space ~
51040 \begin_inset space ~
51044 \begin_inset space ~
51049 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
51052 \begin_layout Section
51054 \begin_inset Index idx
51059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51069 \begin_layout Subsection
51073 \begin_layout Subsubsection
51077 \begin_layout Standard
51082 Cursor follows scrollbar
51084 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when scrolling.
51087 \begin_layout Standard
51090 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
51091 If you set the value to zero,
51092 the thickness of the cursor scales relative to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
51095 \begin_layout Standard
51099 Scroll below end of document
51101 is self-explanatory.
51104 \begin_layout Standard
51107 In \SpecialChar LyX
51108 one can jump from word to word by pressing
51115 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
51117 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
51118 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
51121 \begin_layout Standard
51126 Sort environments alphabetically
51128 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
51131 \begin_layout Standard
51136 Group environments by their category
51138 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
51141 \begin_layout Standard
51148 options determine the editing style for math macros,
51160 \begin_layout Subsubsection
51164 \begin_layout Standard
51167 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
51172 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
51173 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen;
51174 the text then appears centered.
51177 \begin_layout Subsection
51179 \begin_inset Index idx
51184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51191 \begin_inset Index idx
51196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51206 \begin_layout Standard
51212 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
51214 Several binding files are available,
51218 \begin_layout Description
51221 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
51224 \begin_layout Description
51227 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
51238 \begin_layout Description
51241 mac.bind a set of bindings for
51244 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51252 \begin_layout Standard
51255 There are also binding files designed for special document classes,
51261 and binding files for special languages.
51262 The names of language binding files begin with a language code,
51264 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51268 \begin_inset space \space{}
51272 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51276 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51280 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
51281 in a certain language,
51283 will try to use the appropriate binding file.
51286 \begin_layout Standard
51289 Some binding files,
51295 only have a limited scope.
51296 When looking at the end of the file
51301 you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
51304 \begin_layout Standard
51310 \begin_inset space ~
51314 \begin_inset space ~
51319 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function in the selected key binding file.
51322 \begin_layout Subsubsection
51324 \begin_inset CommandInset label
51326 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
51331 \begin_inset Index idx
51336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51346 \begin_layout Standard
51349 To add new or modify existing key bindings to your own taste you can use the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
51350 functions and the bound shortcuts.
51351 To find functions easily,
51352 they are grouped by categories and the dialog provides the field
51354 Show key-bindings containing
51357 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
51358 Insert there for example as keyword
51359 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51363 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51366 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different functions that contain
51367 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51371 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51376 one function can have more than one shortcut.
51377 All \SpecialChar LyX
51378 functions are also listed in the file
51383 that you will find in the
51390 \begin_layout Standard
51394 to add the shortcut
51403 select the function and press the
51408 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
51409 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
51412 \begin_layout Standard
51415 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
51416 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
51417 Function definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the different function names as a semicolon separated list.
51419 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document part.
51423 \begin_layout Standard
51426 If you don't like a particular shortcut,
51430 \begin_layout Standard
51433 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with a text editor.
51434 The syntax of the entries is:
51437 \begin_layout Standard
51444 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51448 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51452 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51457 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51463 \begin_layout Standard
51468 that the key combination definition uses a specific syntax.
51469 This applies to the designators of specific modifier keys (e.
51470 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
51503 respectively) as well as to the other keys.
51504 Note particularly that you cannot use non-alphanumeric characters directly in the definition of the key combination,
51505 but must use commands following the Xlib standard instead (please refer to the existing bind files for a model).
51506 So if you wanted to bind a command to the key combination
51511 you needed to specify it as
51516 If you use the dialog to edit key bindings,
51517 you don't have to care for these specifics.
51519 transforms your input to the correct syntax.
51522 \begin_layout Subsection
51523 لوحة المفاتيح/الفارة
51524 \begin_inset CommandInset label
51526 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
51531 \begin_inset Index idx
51536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51537 خريطة لوحة المفاتيح
51543 \begin_inset Index idx
51548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51550 خريطة لوحة المفاتيح
51558 \begin_layout Standard
51561 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
51562 For the case thatWhere this is not possible,
51564 provides keyboard maps.
51567 you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it is a Romanian one,
51571 \begin_inset space ~
51575 \begin_inset space ~
51580 and select the keyboard map file named
51587 \begin_layout Standard
51604 you can select the first and second with
51609 arg "keymap-primary"
51619 arg "keymap-secondary"
51624 respectively or toggle between them with
51629 arg "keymap-toggle"
51637 \begin_layout Standard
51640 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
51643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51650 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all systems.
51658 \begin_layout Standard
51661 You can also specify the mouse
51663 Wheel scrolling speed
51666 The standard value is 1.0;
51667 higher values speed up the scrolling,
51668 lower ones slow it down.
51671 Middle mouse button pasting
51673 you can determine if pressing the middle mouse button (or the mouse wheel) inserts the content of the clipboard.
51676 \begin_layout Standard
51686 \begin_inset space ~
51690 \begin_inset space ~
51696 you can select a key for zooming.
51697 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated,
51698 the text is zoomed.
51701 \begin_layout Subsection
51702 الإكمال التلقائي للمدخلات
51705 \begin_layout Standard
51708 Input completion is described in section
51709 \begin_inset space ~
51713 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51715 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
51723 \begin_layout Section
51725 \begin_inset CommandInset label
51732 \begin_inset Index idx
51737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51744 \begin_inset Index idx
51749 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51759 \begin_layout Standard
51762 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
51763 are normally determined during the installation.
51764 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
51767 \begin_layout Description
51771 \begin_inset space ~
51774 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
51775 's working directory.
51776 It is the default when you
51788 \begin_inset space ~
51796 \begin_layout Description
51800 \begin_inset space ~
51803 templates This directory will be opened when you use the menu
51805 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
51807 \begin_inset space ~
51811 \begin_inset space ~
51819 \begin_layout Description
51823 \begin_inset space ~
51826 files This directory will be opened when you use the button
51832 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
51836 \begin_inset Newline newline
51840 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
51843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51854 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
51855 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
51863 \begin_layout Description
51867 \begin_inset space ~
51873 \begin_inset Index idx
51878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
51887 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
51888 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
51889 \begin_inset space ~
51893 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51895 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
51905 will be used to save the backups.
51906 \begin_inset Newline newline
51909 Backup files have the ending
51910 \begin_inset Quotes eld
51914 \begin_inset Quotes erd
51920 \begin_layout Description
51924 \begin_inset space ~
51927 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
51928 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
51930 \begin_inset Newline newline
51938 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
51944 You can edit this file with the program
51953 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
51954 in its preferences under
51957 \begin_inset space ~
51963 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation,
51968 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
51970 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position in your \SpecialChar LyX
51977 and \SpecialChar LyX
51978 need to be running the same time.
51979 \begin_inset Newline newline
51982 The pipe is also used for the
51988 \begin_inset space ~
51992 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
51994 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
52000 \begin_inset Newline newline
52003 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
52004 Server-Pipe on Windows,
52005 you must use this pipe name:
52006 \begin_inset Newline newline
52022 \begin_layout Description
52026 \begin_inset space ~
52029 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
52032 \begin_layout Description
52036 \begin_inset space ~
52039 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
52040 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
52043 \begin_layout Description
52047 \begin_inset space ~
52050 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
52055 You only need to specify it if you are using
52059 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
52060 For \SpecialChar LyX
52065 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying a directory.
52068 \begin_layout Description
52072 \begin_inset space ~
52075 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
52076 When \SpecialChar LyX
52077 needs to use an external program,
52078 it looks in this list to see where to find it on the system.
52079 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
52081 so you normally don't have to modify it.
52083 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52087 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
52091 the path list will need to be set only if there are external programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
52094 \begin_layout Description
52098 \begin_inset space ~
52101 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
52102 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
52103 code or in the document preamble.
52104 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by a single dot '.').
52105 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
52106 If files are included,
52107 the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be scanned for the input files.
52108 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
52110 It is recommended that you always include '.' as one of the paths;
52111 otherwise compilation may fail for some documents.
52114 \begin_layout Section
52118 \begin_layout Standard
52121 Here you can insert your
52130 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking,
52131 as described in section
52132 \begin_inset space ~
52136 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52138 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
52144 to mark changes you make as yours.
52147 \begin_layout Section
52149 \begin_inset Index idx
52154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52162 \begin_inset Index idx
52167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52177 \begin_layout Subsection
52179 \begin_inset CommandInset label
52181 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
52188 \begin_layout Description
52192 \begin_inset space ~
52196 \begin_inset space ~
52199 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
52201 You can find its actual translation status here:
52203 \begin_inset CommandInset href
52205 target "https://www.lyx.org/I18n"
52213 \begin_layout Description
52217 \begin_inset space ~
52220 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
52221 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
52222 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
52223 \begin_inset Quotes eld
52227 \begin_inset Quotes erd
52231 \begin_inset Quotes eld
52235 \begin_inset Quotes erd
52239 The most widespread language package is
52246 \begin_inset Index idx
52251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52261 it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
52263 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
52264 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
52265 come with the alternative language package
52272 \begin_inset Index idx
52277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52286 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
52288 there are also specific language packages for languages not covered by
52293 The available selections are described in section
52294 \begin_inset space ~
52298 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52300 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
52308 \begin_layout Description
52312 \begin_inset space ~
52315 start If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
52316 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
52317 you can here specify the command to start the package.
52318 An example is the start command
52324 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
52326 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
52331 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
52347 selectlanguage{$$lang}
52352 \begin_layout Description
52356 \begin_inset space ~
52366 don't have an end command since the start command toggles the package on and off.
52369 \begin_layout Description
52373 \begin_inset space ~
52377 \begin_inset space ~
52380 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point alignment).
52383 \begin_layout Description
52387 \begin_inset space ~
52391 \begin_inset space ~
52394 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
52398 \begin_layout Description
52402 \begin_inset space ~
52406 \begin_inset space ~
52409 globally When this option is set,
52410 the languages used in the document will be added as options to the document class options,
52411 so that they can be used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
52413 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
52420 \begin_layout Description
52424 \begin_inset space ~
52427 begin When this option is set,
52428 documents start with the chosen document language.
52429 When this option is not set,
52433 \begin_inset space ~
52438 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
52440 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
52443 \begin_inset space ~
52451 \begin_layout Description
52455 \begin_inset space ~
52461 \begin_inset space ~
52467 When it is not set,
52471 \begin_inset space ~
52476 is set to the end of the document.
52479 \begin_layout Description
52483 \begin_inset space ~
52487 \begin_inset space ~
52490 languages Text marked formatted in a language different from the document language will be underlined in blue.
52493 \begin_layout Description
52497 \begin_inset space ~
52501 \begin_inset space ~
52504 support Enables the use of languages,
52505 written from right to left (RTL),
52510 \begin_layout Description
52514 \begin_inset space ~
52517 movement When writing RTL,
52518 you can define if the left and right arrow keys move the cursor visually to the left or right,
52521 Logical means that the cursor is moved to the left when pressing the right arrow key and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
52524 \begin_layout Subsection
52528 \begin_layout Standard
52529 إعدادات المدقق الإملائي مشروحة في القسم
52530 \begin_inset space ~
52534 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52536 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
52544 \begin_layout Section
52548 \begin_layout Subsection
52550 \begin_inset CommandInset label
52552 name "subsec:General-output"
52559 \begin_layout Description
52563 \begin_inset space ~
52566 search Commands that will be used for the menu
52568 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
52570 \begin_inset space ~
52576 For a detailed description see section
52578 Reverse DVI/PDF search
52583 \begin_inset space ~
52591 \begin_layout Description
52595 \begin_inset space ~
52598 Options Options for the program
52602 that is used for the export format
52608 \begin_inset space ~
52612 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52614 reference "subsec:Export"
52620 Possible options are listed in the
52625 \begin_inset Newline newline
52629 \begin_inset Flex URL
52632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52634 https://www.tug.org/texinfohtml/dvips.html
52644 \begin_layout Description
52648 \begin_inset space ~
52652 \begin_inset space ~
52655 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using the menu
52657 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
52658 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
52660 \begin_inset space ~
52666 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
52669 \begin_layout Description
52673 \begin_inset space ~
52679 \begin_inset Index idx
52684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52691 \begin_inset Index idx
52696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52705 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
52706 \begin_inset Newline newline
52710 \begin_inset Flex URL
52713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52715 http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/date.1.html
52721 \begin_inset Newline newline
52729 \begin_inset Newline newline
52733 \begin_inset Newline newline
52738 طباعة التاريخ بالشكل يوم/شهر/عام
52741 \begin_layout Description
52745 \begin_inset space ~
52749 \begin_inset space ~
52752 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
52753 is allowed to overwrite on export.
52756 \begin_layout Subsection
52758 \begin_inset CommandInset label
52760 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
52765 \begin_inset Index idx
52770 \begin_layout Plain Layout
52780 \begin_layout Description
52784 \begin_inset space ~
52792 \begin_inset space ~
52796 \begin_inset space ~
52799 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
52804 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
52828 are used for Cyrillic.
52829 Combinations of the encodings are possible,
52831 \begin_inset Quotes eld
52840 \begin_inset Quotes erd
52844 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages \SpecialChar LyX
52845 sets up in the background.
52846 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
52849 \begin_layout Description
52853 \begin_inset space ~
52857 \begin_inset space ~
52861 \begin_inset space ~
52865 \begin_inset space ~
52868 options They only have an effect when the program
52872 is used as DVI-viewer,
52873 read its manual to find out more.
52876 \begin_layout Standard
52879 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
52880 But before you change something,
52881 it is strongly recommended to read the manuals of the applications.
52884 \begin_layout Description
52886 \begin_inset space ~
52890 \begin_inset space ~
52893 المراجع إعدادات إنتاج ثبت المراجع،
52895 \begin_inset space ~
52899 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52901 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
52909 \begin_layout Description
52911 \begin_inset space ~
52914 الفهرس إعدادات إنتاج الفهرس،
52916 \begin_inset space ~
52920 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52922 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
52930 \begin_layout Description
52932 \begin_inset space ~
52936 \begin_inset space ~
52939 المصطلحات إعدادات إنتاج قائمة المصطلحات،
52941 \begin_inset space ~
52945 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
52947 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
52955 \begin_layout Description
52963 \begin_inset space ~
52966 command Command for the program
52968 Check\SpecialChar TeX
52971 that is described in the section
52973 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
52978 Additional Features
52983 \begin_layout Standard
52986 There are additionally the following options:
52989 \begin_layout Description
52993 \begin_inset space ~
52997 \begin_inset space ~
53001 \begin_inset space ~
53005 \begin_inset space ~
53010 \begin_inset space ~
53013 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows,
53015 \begin_inset Quotes eld
53021 \begin_inset Quotes erd
53025 \begin_inset Quotes eld
53029 \begin_inset Quotes erd
53032 to separate folders.
53033 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
53037 \begin_inset Index idx
53042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53049 \begin_inset Index idx
53054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53064 \begin_layout Description
53068 \begin_inset space ~
53072 \begin_inset space ~
53076 \begin_inset space ~
53080 \begin_inset space ~
53084 \begin_inset space ~
53088 \begin_inset space ~
53091 changes Removes all manually set
53097 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
53098 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
53100 \begin_inset space ~
53105 dialog when changing the document class.
53108 \begin_layout Section
53110 \begin_inset Index idx
53115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53124 \begin_layout Subsection
53126 \begin_inset CommandInset label
53128 name "subsec:Converters"
53133 \begin_inset Index idx
53138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53147 \begin_layout Standard
53150 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material from one format to another.
53151 You can modify converters or create new ones.
53152 To modify a converter,
53154 change the entry of the
53161 \begin_inset space ~
53166 field and press the
53171 To create a new converter,
53172 select an existing one,
53173 select a different format in the
53176 \begin_inset space ~
53186 field and press the
53193 \begin_layout Standard
53198 Converter File Cache
53205 conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
53207 Maximum Age (in days
53210 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen a document;
53211 the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
53214 \begin_layout Standard
53217 More about converters,
53218 like the flags that can be used in the converter definition,
53219 is described in the section
53230 \begin_layout Subsection
53232 \begin_inset CommandInset label
53234 name "sec:File-Formats"
53239 \begin_inset Index idx
53244 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53251 \begin_inset Index idx
53256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53265 \begin_layout Standard
53268 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
53278 programs that should be used for certain formats.
53281 \begin_layout Standard
53284 You can also define the
53286 Default output format
53288 that is used when you use
53292 View Master Document
53296 Update Master Document
53302 menu or the toolbar.
53305 \begin_layout Standard
53308 More about formats and their options is described in the section
53319 \begin_layout Standard
53322 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
53323 's temporary directory,
53324 it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
53325 This is done by specifying a
53330 More about this is described in the section
53341 \begin_layout Chapter
53342 الوحدات المتاحة في \SpecialChar LyX
53344 \begin_inset Index idx
53349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53356 \begin_inset CommandInset label
53358 name "chap:Units-available-in"
53365 \begin_layout Standard
53367 \begin_inset space ~
53371 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
53373 reference "tab:Units"
53378 يشرح كل الوحدات المتاحة في \SpecialChar LyX
53379 وتستخدم في هذا المستند.
53382 \begin_layout Standard
53383 \begin_inset Float table
53390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53391 \begin_inset Caption Standard
53393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53396 \begin_inset CommandInset label
53412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53413 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
53419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53421 \begin_inset Tabular
53422 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="21" columns="3">
53423 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
53424 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
53425 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle" width="50col%">
53426 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
53428 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53437 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53446 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53457 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53466 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53471 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53475 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53483 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53494 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53503 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53508 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53512 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53520 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53531 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53540 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53543 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53549 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53560 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53569 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53574 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53578 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
53582 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53590 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53601 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53610 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53614 عرض حرف M في الخط الحالي
53619 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53630 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53633 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53639 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53643 ارتفاع حرف X في الخط الحالي
53648 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53659 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53668 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53671 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53677 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53688 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53697 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53706 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53717 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53726 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53731 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53735 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53743 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53754 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53763 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53768 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53772 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53780 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53791 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53800 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53805 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53809 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53817 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53820 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53828 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53837 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53841 scaled point (65536
53842 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53846 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
53854 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53865 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53868 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53874 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53883 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53896 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53905 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53909 % of height between baselines of two subsequent text lines
53914 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53927 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53936 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53945 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53958 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53967 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53976 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
53979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53989 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
53992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
53998 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54007 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
54010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54020 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54029 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54033 % من العرض الأصلي للصورة
54038 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
54041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54042 \begin_inset space ~
54052 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54061 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54070 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
54073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54083 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54092 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
54095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54101 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
54104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54125 \begin_layout Standard
54128 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
54134 \begin_layout Standard
54135 ثبت المراجع التالي تم إنشاءه باستخدام بيئة ثبت المراجع.
54138 \begin_layout Bibliography
54139 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54140 LatexCommand bibitem
54147 فريق \SpecialChar LyX
54150 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54153 target "https://www.lyx.org/Credits"
54159 \begin_inset Newline newline
54163 \begin_inset Flex URL
54166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54168 https://www.lyx.org/Credits
54176 \begin_layout Bibliography
54177 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54178 LatexCommand bibitem
54179 key "latexcompanion"
54186 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
54189 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
54190 Companion Second Edition.
54197 \begin_layout Bibliography
54198 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54199 LatexCommand bibitem
54207 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
54211 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
54219 \begin_layout Bibliography
54220 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54221 LatexCommand bibitem
54234 A Document Preparation System.
54242 \begin_layout Bibliography
54243 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54244 LatexCommand bibitem
54256 The \SpecialChar TeX
54264 \begin_layout Bibliography
54265 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54266 LatexCommand bibitem
54272 أصناف \SpecialChar TeX
54274 \begin_inset Newline newline
54278 \begin_inset Flex URL
54281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54283 https://ctan.org/topic
54291 \begin_layout Bibliography
54292 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54293 LatexCommand bibitem
54299 أسئلة شائعة عن \SpecialChar LaTeX
54301 \begin_inset Newline newline
54305 \begin_inset Flex URL
54308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54310 http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq/
54318 \begin_layout Bibliography
54319 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54320 LatexCommand bibitem
54327 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54330 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
54337 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
54341 \begin_inset Newline newline
54345 \begin_inset Flex URL
54348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54350 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
54358 \begin_layout Bibliography
54359 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54360 LatexCommand bibitem
54367 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54370 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
54377 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
54381 \begin_inset Newline newline
54385 \begin_inset Flex URL
54388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54390 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
54398 \begin_layout Bibliography
54399 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54400 LatexCommand bibitem
54407 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54410 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf"
54420 \begin_inset Index idx
54425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54433 \begin_inset Newline newline
54437 \begin_inset Flex URL
54440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54442 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf
54450 \begin_layout Bibliography
54451 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54452 LatexCommand bibitem
54459 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54462 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf"
54467 عن حزمة \SpecialChar LaTeX
54473 \begin_inset Index idx
54478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54486 \begin_inset Newline newline
54490 \begin_inset Flex URL
54493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54495 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf
54503 \begin_layout Bibliography
54504 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54505 LatexCommand bibitem
54512 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54515 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
54525 \begin_inset Newline newline
54529 \begin_inset Flex URL
54532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54534 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
54542 \begin_layout Bibliography
54543 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54544 LatexCommand bibitem
54545 key "makeindex-man"
54551 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54554 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi"
54564 \begin_inset Newline newline
54568 \begin_inset Flex URL
54571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54573 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi
54581 \begin_layout Bibliography
54582 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54583 LatexCommand bibitem
54590 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54593 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
54603 \begin_inset Newline newline
54607 \begin_inset Flex URL
54610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54612 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
54620 \begin_layout Bibliography
54621 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54622 LatexCommand bibitem
54629 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54632 target "https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
54637 عن حزمة AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
54639 \begin_inset Newline newline
54643 \begin_inset Flex URL
54646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54648 https://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
54656 \begin_layout Bibliography
54657 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54658 LatexCommand bibitem
54665 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54668 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
54673 عن حزمة \SpecialChar LaTeX
54679 \begin_inset Index idx
54684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54692 \begin_inset Newline newline
54696 \begin_inset Flex URL
54699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54701 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
54709 \begin_layout Bibliography
54710 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54711 LatexCommand bibitem
54718 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54721 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
54726 عن حزمة \SpecialChar LaTeX
54732 \begin_inset Index idx
54737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54745 \begin_inset Newline newline
54749 \begin_inset Flex URL
54752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54754 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
54762 \begin_layout Bibliography
54763 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54764 LatexCommand bibitem
54771 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54774 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
54779 عن حزمة \SpecialChar LaTeX
54785 \begin_inset Index idx
54790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54798 \begin_inset Newline newline
54802 \begin_inset Flex URL
54805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54807 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
54815 \begin_layout Bibliography
54816 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54817 LatexCommand bibitem
54824 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54827 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf"
54832 عن حزمة \SpecialChar LaTeX
54838 \begin_inset Index idx
54843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54851 \begin_inset Newline newline
54855 \begin_inset Flex URL
54858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54860 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/hyperref/doc/manual.pdf
54868 \begin_layout Bibliography
54869 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54870 LatexCommand bibitem
54877 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54880 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf"
54885 عن حزمة \SpecialChar LaTeX
54891 \begin_inset Index idx
54896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54904 \begin_inset Newline newline
54908 \begin_inset Flex URL
54911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54913 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf
54921 \begin_layout Bibliography
54922 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54923 LatexCommand bibitem
54930 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54933 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
54938 عن حزمة \SpecialChar LaTeX
54944 \begin_inset Index idx
54949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54957 \begin_inset Newline newline
54961 \begin_inset Flex URL
54964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
54966 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
54974 \begin_layout Bibliography
54975 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
54976 LatexCommand bibitem
54983 \begin_inset CommandInset href
54986 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
54991 عن حزمة \SpecialChar LaTeX
54997 \begin_inset Index idx
55002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55010 \begin_inset Newline newline
55014 \begin_inset Flex URL
55017 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55019 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
55027 \begin_layout Bibliography
55028 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
55029 LatexCommand bibitem
55036 \begin_inset CommandInset href
55039 target "https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
55044 عن حزمة \SpecialChar LaTeX
55050 \begin_inset Index idx
55055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55063 \begin_inset Newline newline
55067 \begin_inset Flex URL
55070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55072 https://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
55080 \begin_layout Bibliography
55081 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
55082 LatexCommand bibitem
55089 \begin_inset CommandInset href
55092 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
55097 كيف تعد \SpecialChar LyX
55099 \begin_inset Newline newline
55103 \begin_inset Flex URL
55106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55108 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
55116 \begin_layout Bibliography
55117 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
55118 LatexCommand bibitem
55125 \begin_inset CommandInset href
55128 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
55133 كيف تعد \SpecialChar LyX
55135 \begin_inset Newline newline
55139 \begin_inset Flex URL
55142 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55144 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
55152 \begin_layout Bibliography
55153 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
55154 LatexCommand bibitem
55163 \begin_inset CommandInset href
55166 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
55173 كيف تعد \SpecialChar LyX
55174 للكتابة بالسيريلية:
55175 \begin_inset Newline newline
55179 \begin_inset Flex URL
55182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55184 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
55192 \begin_layout Bibliography
55193 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
55194 LatexCommand bibitem
55201 \begin_inset CommandInset href
55204 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
55209 كيف تعد \SpecialChar LyX
55211 \begin_inset Newline newline
55215 \begin_inset Flex URL
55218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55220 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
55228 \begin_layout Bibliography
55229 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
55230 LatexCommand bibitem
55237 \begin_inset CommandInset href
55240 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
55245 كيف تعد \SpecialChar LyX
55247 \begin_inset Newline newline
55251 \begin_inset Flex URL
55254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55256 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
55264 \begin_layout Bibliography
55265 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
55266 LatexCommand bibitem
55273 \begin_inset CommandInset href
55276 target "https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
55281 كيف تعد \SpecialChar LyX
55282 للكتابة باليابانية:
55283 \begin_inset Newline newline
55287 \begin_inset Flex URL
55290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55292 https://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
55300 \begin_layout Standard
55301 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
55308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55338 \begin_inset Note Note
55341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55350 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
55351 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following bibliography is the second one:
55359 \begin_layout Standard
55360 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
55361 LatexCommand bibtex
55362 btprint "btPrintCited"
55363 bibfiles "../biblio/LyXDocs"
55372 \begin_layout Standard
55373 ثبت المراجع في الأعلى تم إنشاءه من قاعدة بيانات Bib\SpecialChar TeX
55377 \begin_layout Standard
55381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55387 pagedeclaration}[1]{
55390 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55397 hyperlink{page.#1}{page
55407 \begin_inset Note Note
55410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
55413 This command makes the page number a clickable hyperlink,
55415 \begin_inset space ~
55419 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
55421 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Options"
55434 \begin_layout Standard
55435 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
55436 LatexCommand printnomenclature
55442 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
55443 LatexCommand printindex